Owner Manual Kone

lïåÉêÛë=açÅìãÉåí~íáçå= =

= =

=

=

ltkboÛp=j^krî= j^pqbo=

= fk=`ljmif^k`b=tfqe= b`=ifcqp=afob`qfsb=VRLNSLb`= ~åÇ= qeb=ifcqp=obdri^qflkp=pKfK=NVVT=L=UPN= = = pÉêá~ä== kìãÄÉê= QONQRPTT=

=

=

páíÉ== iáÑí=Î= ^ÇÇêÉëë= P=pí=m~ìäë=mä~ÅÉI= `Ü~êäÉë=píêÉÉíI= pÜÉÑÑáÉäÇI= pN=Ok_=

«=OMNR=hlkb=éäÅ= ^ää=êáÖÜíë=êÉëÉêîÉÇ=

=

oÉîáëáçå=^=J=MQLMULNR=

Owner’s Documentation Contents

OWNER’S DOCUMENTATION IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE LIFTS DIRECTIVE 95/16/EC, THE LIFTS REGULATIONS S.I. 1997/831 And BS EN 81-1 : 1998 + A3 : 2009 Elevator Type - KONE MonoSpace

®

Contents 0. 1.

2.

Introduction Basic Documentation

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

Technical Documentation 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

3.

4.

Plans Of The Lift In The Building Electric Schematic Diagrams Basic Characteristics Of Safety Components Basic Characteristics Of Ropes

Maintenance Instructions

3.1 3.2 3.3

General Maintenance Instructions For The Elevator Maintenance Instructions For Safety Components Periodical Inspections

Instructions For Use 4.1 4.2

5.

Declaration Of Conformity Basic Characteristics. Log Book Copies Of Examinations, Inspection Reports, Observations Etc.

Instructions For Normal Use Of The Elevator Instructions For Rescue Operation.

Additional Information

5.1 Communication System Manual Additional information relevant to this elevator may also be included in this section.

© 2015 KONE plc All rights reserved

1(5)

Owner’s Documentation Introduction

0.

INTRODUCTION

The purpose and scope of this elevator user guide is to provide you with some general tips on how to get the best use from the elevator(s) in your building and what to do if the elevator should malfunction for some reason. Safety and reliability are KONE's primary concerns and have been strongly emphasized in the design, manufacture, installation and maintenance processes of this elevator. The revolutionary elevator technology, together with KONE's quality, guarantees you a modern, ecologically-friendly elevator which will maintain its functionality in the years to come. Planned preventive maintenance helps you take care of your elevator. You can ensure the future value of your investment by implementing a carefully-planned preventive maintenance program, carried out by a competent maintenance company. KONE has the experience and knowledge needed to plan and carry out a program that will meet all the maintenance needs of your elevator Note that only Section 1 “Basic Documentation) is supplied on paper. Sections 2 (Technical Information), 3 (Maintenance), 4 (Operation) and 5 of the manual are provided on the enclosed CD-ROM in Adobe® Acrobat® PDF Format, in compliance with The Lifts Regulations 1997. Most computers will be able to open the PDF file. If the file does not open you can download Adobe Reader ® from the Adobe website www.adobe.com.

®

The master copy must be maintained by the owner throughout the life of the elevator installation. Printed copies of the manual should only include Section 1.2 “Basic Characteristics”. Copies should not include Sections 1.1, 1.3 and 1.4 since there is no requirement under the Lifts Regulations 1997 to maintain copies of the manual. Notice

This manual should be stored so that it is accessible to authorised persons if needed.

Notice

MAINTENANCE ACCESS PANEL KEY The keys to the Maintenance Access Panel and landing doors must be kept in a secure place inaccessible to unauthorized persons. The keys may be given only to competent maintenance persons as defined in Section 3.1.1.3.

Copyright This document has been developed from the industry guideline for "Owner’s Documentation" published by the European Elevator Association. All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or translated into another language or format, in whole or part, without prior written permission of KONE Corporation. Copyright is held by KONE plc and KONE Corporation. ®

®

®

®

KONE EcoSpace™, MonoSpace , MiniSpace™, S-MiniSpace™, EcoDisc , EcoDom , TranSys™, KoneXion and KRM and all other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONE Corporation in various countries. The proprietor of the elevator to which this manual relates, his employees and agents, have a licence to use the information contained herein for the sole purposes of operation and maintenance of the Elevator installation defined within this manual. Such information imparted to any such employee or agent shall be held as confidential by such employee or agent. © 2015 KONE plc All rights reserved

2(5)


National Statutory Requirements In addition to The Lifts Regulations 1997 you may need to follow national statutory requirements that are not discussed in this document. Typical requirements include the following: • • • •

Fire regulations Safe Working rules Elevator maintenance regulations Electromagnetic compatibility

Readers of this document must also take note of the following documentation: EN 81-1: Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Part 1: Electric lifts EN 12015: Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family standard for lifts, escalators and moving walks Emission EN 12016: Electromagnetic compatibility - Product family standard for lifts, escalators and moving walks Immunity EN 81-21: Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Lifts for the transport of persons and goods - Part 21: New passenger and goods passenger lifts in existing building EN 81-58: Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Examination and tests - Part 58: Landing doors fire resistance test EN 81-70: Safety rules for the construction and installations of lifts - Particular applications for passenger and good passenger lifts - Part 70: Accessibility to lifts for persons including persons with disability EN 81-71:Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Particular applications to passenger lifts and goods passenger lifts - Part 71: Vandal resistant lifts EN 81-72: Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Particular applications for passenger and goods passenger lifts - Part 72: Firefighters lifts EN 81-73: Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts - Particular applications for passenger and goods passenger lifts - Part 73: Behaviour of lifts in the event of fire

Authorisation Notice This publication is for informational purposes only. All persons participating in the maintenance of KONE equipment, or participating in the rescue of trapped passengers, and using these instructions must be familiar with KONE equipment and technology and must be qualified to perform such work.

Disclaimer Of Warranties And Liabilities KONE reserves the right at any time to alter the product design, specifications and procedures reflected in this document. NO STATEMENT CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE CONSTRUED AS A WARRANTY OR CONDITION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO ANY PRODUCT, SPECIFICATION OR PROCEDURE, ITS MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR QUALITY, OR AS A MODIFICATION OR REPRESENTATION OF THE TERMS OF ANY PURCHASE AGREEMENT. KONE DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY RESULTING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT. KONE HAS NO LIABILITY FOR TYPOGRAPHICAL OR OTHER ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT OR ANYONE'S INTERPRETATION OF THE INSTRUCTIONS. THE USER OF THIS DOCUMENT ASSUMES ALL RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OR DISCLOSURE OF THIS DOCUMENT.


3(5)


Illustration Notice The illustrations in this manual (with the exception of project specific drawings) are generic and may differ in some cases from the material used for the actual elevator.

Audience This document is intended for the elevator owner, competent maintenance company and authorities performing periodical inspections.


4(5)

Owner’s Documentation Contacts

Sales And Servicing Offices - KONE plc

KONE plc Call Centre Tel :- 0800 652 0692

KONE plc Head Office

Global House, Station Place, Fox Lane North, Chertsey, Surrey, KT16 9HW Tel :- 0845 1 999 999 Fax :- 0870 770 1144 [email protected] www.kone.co.uk

KONE (NI) Ltd

Unit B2, 19 Heron Road, Sydenham Business Park, Belfast, BT3 9LE Tel :- 028 9073 5900 (0845 330 5850 Outside office hours) Fax :- 028 9073 5901 [email protected] www.kone.ie


5(5)

Owner’s Documentation Basic Documentation

1.

BASIC DOCUMENTATION

1.1

Declaration Of Conformity

2

1.2

Detailed Specification

3

1.3

Log Book

5

1.4

Copies Of Examinations, Inspection Reports, Observations Etc. 11


1 ( 11 )

lïåÉêÛë=açÅìãÉåí~íáçå= _~ëáÅ=açÅìãÉåí~íáçå=

= =

=

=

∆

abìô^qflk=lc=`lkclojfqv=clo=^=jçåçpé~ÅÉ =bibs^qlo= fkpqîibo=

il`^qflk=lc=fkpqîi^qflk= iáÑí=Î=

hlkb=éäÅ= däçÄ~ä=eçìëÉI= pí~íáçå=mä~ÅÉI= cçñ=i~åÉ=kçêíÜI= `ÜÉêíëÉóI= hqNS=Vet=

P=pí=m~ìäë=mä~ÅÉI= `Ü~êäÉë=píêÉÉíI= pÜÉÑÑáÉäÇI= pN=Ok_=

pÉêá~ä=kìãÄÉê=

QONQRPTT=

vÉ~ê=çÑ=fåëí~ää~íáçå=

OMNR=

hlkb= éäÅI= ÇÉÅä~êÉë= íÜ~í= íÜÉ= jçåçpé~ÅÉ∆= bäÉî~íçê= ÇÉí~áäÉÇ= ÄÉäçï= ãÉÉíëI= ~ë= Ñ~ê= ~ë= áí= áë= ïáíÜáå= çìê= ëÅçéÉ= çÑ= áåÑäìÉåÅÉ=~åÇ=êÉëéçåëáÄáäáíóI=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖ=äÉÖáëä~íáçå=~åÇLçê=êÉÖìä~íáçåëK= qÜÉ=pìééäó=lÑ=j~ÅÜáåÉêó=Ep~ÑÉíóF=oÉÖìä~íáçåë=OMMU=EpKfK=OMMU=kìãÄÉê=NRVT=ÄÉáåÖ=íÜÉ=rh=íê~åëéçëáíáçå= çÑ=br=j~ÅÜáåÉêó=aáêÉÅíáîÉ=OMMSLQOLb`F= qÜÉ= iáÑíë= oÉÖìä~íáçåë= NVVT= EpKf= NVVT= kìãÄÉê= UPN= ÄÉáåÖ= íÜÉ= rh= íê~åëéçëáíáçå= çÑ= iáÑíë= aáêÉÅíáîÉ= VRLNSLb`F=çéÉê~íáåÖ=çåÉ=çê=~=ÅçãÄáå~íáçå=çÑ=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖW= clo=qeb=abpfdk=me^pbW= ^å=ÉäÉî~íçê=Åçãéäá~åí=ïáíÜ=b`=qóéÉ=bñ~ãáå~íáçå=`ÉêíáÑáÅ~íÉ=ki=NMJQMMJNMMOJMMOJQR=oÉîáëáçå=kçK=Q=fëëìÉÇ=Äó= iáÑíáåëíáíììí=ÄKîKI=^ãëíÉêÇ~ã=EMQMMF================= = = = = ======================= clo=qeb=fkpqîi^qflk=^ka=qbpqfkd=me^pbW= `çãéäá~åÅÉ= ïáíÜ= mêçÇìÅíáçå=nì~äáíó=^ëëìê~åÅÉI= pÅÜÉÇìäÉ=NP=E^ååÉñ=ufsF= EïáíÜáå= çìê= ^ååÉñ= ufff= `ÉêíáÑáÅ~íÉF= fëëìÉÇ=ÄóW=kçíáÑáÉÇ=_çÇó==_ìêÉ~ì=sÉêáí~ë=EMMQNF============= ?m~êâä~åÇë?I=táãëäçï=oç~ÇI=aáÇëÄìêóI=j~åÅÜÉëíÉêI=jOM=Oob= abpfdk=fp=_^pba=lk=qeb=cliiltfkd=eôjlkfpba=pq^kaôapW= _p=bk=UNJNWNVVU=H=^PWOMMV=p~ÑÉíó=êìäÉë=Ñçê=íÜÉ=ÅçåëíêìÅíáçå=~åÇ=áåëí~ää~íáçå=çÑ=äáÑíë=Ó=m~êí=NW=bäÉÅíêáÅ=iáÑíëK= ^ÅÅÉëëáÄáäáíó=çÑ=íÜÉ=aáë~ÄäÉÇW=`çãéäá~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=_p=bk=UNJTM=W=OMMP= léÉê~íáçå=áå=Å~ëÉ=çÑ=cáêÉW=`çãéäá~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=_p=bk=UNJTP=W=OMMR= s~åÇ~ä=oÉëáëí~åÅÉW=kçí=~ééäáÅ~ÄäÉK= _p=bk=UNJOUWOMMPW=oÉãçíÉ=~ä~êã=çå=é~ëëÉåÖÉê=~åÇ=ÖççÇë=é~ëëÉåÖÉê=äáÑíëK= _p=bk=NPMNRWOMMN=j~áåíÉå~åÅÉ=Ñçê=äáÑíë=~åÇ=ÉëÅ~ä~íçêë=Ó=oìäÉë=Ñçê=j~áåíÉå~åÅÉ=áåëíêìÅíáçåëK= cáêÉ=êÉëáëí~åÅÉ=çÑ=ä~åÇáåÖ=ÇççêëW=`çãéäá~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=_p=bk=UNJRU=W=OMMP= qÜÉ= bäÉÅíêçã~ÖåÉíáÅ= `çãé~íáÄáäáíó= oÉÖìä~íáçåë= OMMS= EpKfK= OMMS= kìãÄÉê= PQNU= ÄÉáåÖ= íÜÉ= rh= íê~åëéçëáíáçå=çÑ=bj`=aáêÉÅíáîÉ=OMMQLNMULb`F=Äó=íÜÉ=ÑçääçïáåÖW= `çãéäá~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=e~êãçåáòÉÇ=pí~åÇ~êÇ=_p=bk=NOMNRWOMNQ=bäÉÅíêçã~ÖåÉíáÅ=Åçãé~íáÄáäáíóK==mêçÇìÅí=Ñ~ãáäó= ëí~åÇ~êÇ=Ñçê=äáÑíëI=ÉëÅ~ä~íçêë=~åÇ=ãçîáåÖ=ï~äâëK==bãáëëáçåK= `çãéäá~åÅÉ=ïáíÜ=íÜÉ=e~êãçåáòÉÇ=pí~åÇ~êÇ=_p=bk=NOMNSWOMNP=bäÉÅíêçã~ÖåÉíáÅ=Åçãé~íáÄáäáíóK==mêçÇìÅí=Ñ~ãáäó= ëí~åÇ~êÇ=Ñçê=äáÑíëI=ÉëÅ~ä~íçêë=~åÇ=ãçîáåÖ=ï~äâëK==fããìåáíó=

bäÉî~íçê=qóéÉW=

jçåçpé~ÅÉ=qê~Åíáçå=J=m~ëëÉåÖÉê=L=dççÇë=

mä~ÅÉ=çÑ=páÖåáåÖ=

=

a~íÉ=

=

k~ãÉ=çÑ=êÉëéçåëáÄäÉ= éÉêëçå=

=

páÖå~íìêÉ=

=

kçíÉW=^=éÜçíçÅçéó=çÑ=íÜÉ=ëáÖåÉÇ=ÇÉÅä~ê~íáçå=ãìëí=ÄÉ=ëÉåí=íç=fåëí~ää~íáçå=aÉé~êíãÉåíI=`ÜÉêíëÉóKK «=OMNR=hlkb=éäÅ= ^ää=êáÖÜíë=êÉëÉêîÉÇ=

= O=E=NN=F=

lïåÉêÛë=açÅìãÉåí~íáçå= _~ëáÅ=açÅìãÉåí~íáçå=

= =

=

=

NKOK=

aÉí~áäÉÇ=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçå=

NKOKN=

_~ëáÅ=`Ü~ê~ÅíÉêáëíáÅë=Ñçê=bäÉî~íçê=kìãÄÉê=W=QONQRPTT=

qóéÉ=çÑ=bäÉî~íçê=WJ=

hlkb=jçåçpé~ÅÉ∆=TMM=

o~íÉÇ=iç~Ç=WJ=

NMMMâÖ=

kìãÄÉê=çÑ=éÉêëçåë=WJ=

NP=

kìãÄÉê=çÑ=iÉîÉäë=ëÉêîÉÇ=WJ=

NM=

qê~îÉä=WJ=

PSKVNM=ãÉíêÉë=

o~íÉÇ=péÉÉÇ=WJ=

OKM=ãLë=

o~íÉÇ=pí~êíë=éÉê=eçìê=WJ=

NUM=

aêáîÉ=WJ=

hajQM=

`çåíêçääÉê=léíáçåë=WJ=

cfaI=mo`=

aççê=póëíÉã=WJ=

^ja=N=J=O=é~åÉä=ÅÉåíêÉ=çéÉåáåÖ=

aççê=léÉê~íçê=WJ=

hlkb=^ja=

mìëÜÉë=WJ=

hlkb=hpp=

fåÇáÅ~íçêë=WJ=

hlkb=hpp=

`çåíêçä=póëíÉã=WJ=

hlkb=i`b= hlkb=aÉëíáå~íáçå=`çåíêçä=póëíÉã=

`~ê=qçé=`çåíêçä=WJ=

hlkb=

p~ÑÉíó=dÉ~ê=WJ=

hlkb=pd_=MN=

lîÉêëéÉÉÇ=dçîÉêåçê=WJ=

hlkb=li=PR=

_ìÑÑÉê=WJ=

l_=OM=láä=

j~ÅÜáåÉ=WJ=

ju=NM=

^ëÅÉåÇáåÖ=`~ê=lîÉêëéÉÉÇ=éêçíÉÅíáçå=WJ=

ju=NM=j~ÅÜáåÉ=Äê~âÉ=

`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë=L=fåíÉêÅçã=WJ=

hoj=J=hlkb=oÉãçíÉ=jçåáíçêáåÖ= hlkb=bJiáåâ=bäÉî~íçê=j~å~ÖÉãÉåí=póëíÉã=

cáêÉ=o~íáåÖ=WJ=

O=Üçìêë=

líÜÉê=WJ=

kL^===============================

mçïÉê=oÉèìáêÉãÉåíë=L=sçäí~ÖÉë=WJ=

QMMsI=RMeò=qÜêÉÉ=mÜ~ëÉ=C=kÉìíê~äI=OPMs==ëáåÖäÉ=éÜ~ëÉ=

=

«=OMNR=hlkb=éäÅ= ^ää=êáÖÜíë=êÉëÉêîÉÇ=

= P=E=NN=F=


1.2.2

Layout Characteristics

Description of the Elevator ®

The Monospace elevator is a machine room - less concept. The machine is installed in the headroom of the well. The control cabinet is installed in the lift shaft with a Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) situated near the topmost landing door, on the machinery side. The suspension is of the underslung type with a reeving factor 2: 1. The machine as well as the rope fixing brackets are mounted on the guide rails. The main characteristics of the lay-out are shown below.

Fixing point Car side

MX Machine

Fixing point Counterweight side

Lift Car

Counterweight


4 ( 11 )


1.3

Log Book

The logbook shall be safely kept and maintained by the owner as long as the elevator is in existence.

BASIC INFORMATION OF ELEVATOR INSTALLATION Installation No: Contract No: Hand over date: Site address:

The Elevator was first put into service on: Name of company performing maintenance: Start date of the maintenance contract: The log must be kept up-to-date in the case of:1. Important modifications to the Elevator (Annex E, EN81-1); 2. Replacement Ropes or important parts; 3. Accidents ; You must carry out examinations and tests after important modifications or after an accident to ascertain that your elevator continues to conform to standard. You must carry out these examinations and tests in accordance with EN 81-1 Annex E.

The Owner of the installation must ensure that the risk assessment for maintenance is updated :1. 2. 3. 4.

If the maintenance organisation is replaced; If the use of the building and/or the installation changes; After a major modification of the installation or of the building; After an accident involving the installation.


5 ( 11 )


LOG BOOK Event 1, 2 or 3

Date


Page 1 Name of person and Company carrying out the works

Brief description of Event. (Modifications, replacement parts, ropes etc, accidents). If further information is filed please reference to the Log entry and file at the rear of Section one.

6 ( 11 )



Date




7 ( 11 )



Date




8 ( 11 )



Date




9 ( 11 )



Date


Page Name of person and Company carrying out the works


10 ( 11 )


1.4

Copies Of Examinations, Inspection Reports, Observations Etc.

This section in accordance with BS EN 81-1:1998 Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts – Part 1: Electric Lifts. Clause 16.2.b, is intended to keep duplicate copies of examinations, inspection reports, observations etc.


11 ( 11 )

Owner’s Documentation Technical Documentation

2. 2.1

TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION

Plans of the Elevator in the Building ................................................................... 2 2.1.1

Description ........................................................................................................................ 2

2.2

Electric Schematic Diagrams .............................................................................. 15

2.3

Basic Characteristics of Safety Components ...................................................... 80

2.4

Basic Characteristics for Ropes .......................................................................... 81 2.4.1 2.4.2

Suspension Rope ............................................................................................................. 81 Overspeed Governor Rope ............................................................................................... 81

2.4.3

Compensation Cable ....................................................................................................... 81


11 ( 81 )


2.1

Plans of the Elevator in the Building

2.1.1

Description ®

KONE’s MonoSpace elevator does not require a machine room; it is machine-room-less and is completely installed inside the shaft. The main compulsory characteristics are :• The machinery electric drive and controller are placed inside the headroom of the shaft; • A Maintenance access Panel (MAP), containing switches for remote control, is positioned on the topmost (or, occasionally, topmost –1) landing. ®

KONE MonoSpace elevators are completely supported by their own guide rails. For this reason, the only interface between the elevator and the building are: doors, pit equipment, guide rail brackets, machinery, and rope fixings. All other accessories are fixed to the guide rails. The guide rails are placed in the shaft following a "counterweight-on-the-side" scheme. The machinery and the counterweight itself are located on the same side of the shaft. Which side they are placed depends on whether the elevator is left-handed or right-handed (This is defined as viewed from the landing door with the Maintenance Access Panel on the topmost floor). Due to this "counterweight-on-the-side" scheme, the guide rail fixings are of three different types: one combined bracket on the machinery side that fixes one car and one counterweight guide rail; one bracket that fixes the opposite counterweight guide rail (again on the machinery side); and one bracket on the nontraction side that fixes only the car guide rail.


12 ( 81 )


2.2

Electric Schematic Diagrams


115 ( 81 )

WIRING DIAGRAMS

Part number:

KOU *350045814*

*KM750172G01*

Designed by RAGESH.E.G Number 864841E00 864841E00 864841E00 350045814E01 1374505E01 864842E01 350045814E01 350045814E01 350045814E02 811850E02 811850E02 50301204E02 1356800E02 350045814E02 350045814E02 350045814E03 1356801E03 350045814E03 1374506E04 350045814E04 811852E05 350045814E06 350045814E06 350045814E06 350045814E06 861393E07 1356801E08 1356802E08 864841E09 350045814E10 350045814E10 50301204E10

-

Sales order number:

42145377-79 350045814-16

KONE Equipment number: Customer:

Printing date 26/05/2015

Issue Issue 1 A B D D A D -

Page 1 2 3 1 1 1 4 5 1 2 3 1 1 6 7 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 1 1 2 1

Date 20.05.2015

Change description

Title Position number table Position number table Position number table Power Supply Machinery, Controller and MAP KGC - LON ADAPTERS - CONTROL PANEL MACHINE ROOM NETWORK MACHINE ROOM NETWORK Calls and Signals Safety chain Safety chain and lighting KDCDOP DCS electrification SHAFT NETWORK ARRANGEMENT Calls and signals Car roof, AMD_D2 Car COP Travelling cable I Drive module Drive module Safety chain Optional PC-board wiring DCS Group connections DCS Group connections DCS Group connections Control module Signals in car, COP Signals in car, COP Car calls Landing calls and signals Landing calls and signals Landing Calls and Signals

WIRING DIAGRAMS Number 350045814E10 350045814E10 861397E10 856476E11 713310E14 350045814E15 811853E15 350045814E15 350045814E15 350045814E15 885520E18 1374526E23 880331E23 812301E24 812301E24 781712E25 812305E26 861951E26 350045814E28 350045814E60 861393E60 861393E60 861393E60 350045814E90 350045814E90 350045814E90 350045814E90 1374514E91 350045814E90 771664

Issue A C B C C C A C C C C C

Page 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 5 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 6 1


Title Landing Calls and Signals Landing Calls and Signals Landing Calls and Signals (ONLY FOR ORDER:350045816) AMD DRIVE2 A-side ADO/ACL-circuit LCEOPT/FRD/FID/EPD/OSS/WSC/DCL/OSI/DAL Additional devices EPS EN81-28 EN81-28 EN81-28 Lift announcer ACU, LON interface Lighting and alarm Lighting and alarm (ONLY FOR ORDER:350045816) KRM/Car KRM/Controller Maintenance intercom ISM FRD / FID FRD EN(ONLY FOR ORDER:350045816) Connection of ELINK cables Floor table Shaft vane diagram Shaft vane diagram Shaft vane diagram Layout for MAP Layout for switches and options module Layout for top module Layout for SEP Layout for top module LAyout for options module MCD/DELTA Electrification

ELEVATOR PARAMETERS: Number

Description

ELEVATOR CONFIGURATION: Option ACL ACU ADO AMD_D2 AMD_D2 BFS BFS C_PROCESS CPU561 DAL_GP DAL_GP

Description Accurate Levelling Elevator announcer Advance door opening AMD Drive 2 doors AMD Drive 2 doors Buffer switch Buffer switch C-Process elevator CPU 5.6.1 Disturbance alarm, general, potential free contact Disturbance alarm, general, potential free contact

Value

WIRING DIAGRAMS Option ELF ELINK EMH_T EN81_73 EPD EPS FID FID_B FID_B GB ISM ISM KDM KQT_E KRM KRM KSS LCEOPT_POS1 LCEOPT_POS1 LCEOPT_POS1 LCERAL LCERAL LCERAL MCD MSW4S MSW4S MX10 NOCAB OPTIONS OPTIONS ROPING_2_1 SEGMENTED_SHAFT SHL SL_BRAKE TOPMOST_1 TRIPLEX TRIPLEX COP2 MSWREV SECOND_COP SPEED_2M

Description Extra long floor E-Link Emergency stop in pit No entry light for EN81-73 Operation stand-by + recovery Emergency power sequencer Fire detection Fire detection, whole building Fire detection, whole building United Kingdom Maintenance intercom Maintenance intercom KDM Drive KQT Extension KRM system KRM system KSS COP Options provided by LCEOPT Pos.1 card (Hex 0 F) Options provided by LCEOPT Pos.1 card (Hex 0 F) Options provided by LCEOPT Pos.1 card (Hex 0 F) Remote alarm Remote alarm Remote alarm MCD car MSW4S distribution system MSW4S distribution system MX10 Machinery NoCabinet elevator Options Options Roping 2:1 Segmented shaft power supply Shaft lighting Silent Brake MAP at topmost -1 Triplex Triplex Number of COP Main switch with reversed connection 2nd COP Rated speed 2,0 m/s


1

A

COPYRIGHT (C) 2006 KONE CORPORATION

B

C

D

A4

E

F

G

1 1:T 6:1

2 HOISTING MOTOR THERMISTORS RESOLVER

3

4

6:3 7 10 10:T 11 13 14 18 20 22 25 26 28 30 31 32 32:EXT 33 33:B 33:N 33:U 34 34:S 34:E 35 36 37 38 39 41 42:DS 42:U 42:N 42:RB 42:SL 43 44 44:1-2 45 51 52 53 57 60 61 B61 63 64 65 66 68:U 71 77:U 77:N

ENCODER TRANSFORMER FAN THERMAL CONTACT BRAKE SOLENOID SLACK ROPE CONTACT STOP SWITCH IN MACHINERY FIRE INDICATION IN MACHINE ROOM MAIN SWITCH UNIT OVERSPEED GOVERNOR CONTACT SEISMIC DEVICE OVERSPEED GOVERNOR CONTACT FOR COUNTERWEIGHT HAND WHEEL CONTACT DOOR ZONE SWITCH CAR CALL BUTTONS I/O-BOARD COPMUL EXPANSION BOARD LCEFCB ATTENDANT SWITCH ATTENDANT BY-PASS ATTENDANT DOWN ATTENDANT UP DOOR OPEN BUTTON DOOR CLOSE BUTTON DOOR EXTENSION TIME PRIORITY DRIVE SWITCH SWITCH FOR CAR LIGHTING SWITCH FOR CAR FAN LOCKING SWITCH ALARM BUTTON STOP SWITCH ON CAR ROOF SWITCH FOR INSPECTION DRIVE INSPECTION BUTTON "UP" INSPECTION BUTTON "DOWN" INSPECTION BUTTON "RUN" SERVICE LIGHT CAR FAN CAR LIGHTING EMERGENCY LIGHTING SOCKET ON CAR ROOF FINAL LIMIT SWITCH IN CAR SAFETY GEAR CONTACT SLACK ROPE CONTACT EMERGENCY EXIT CONTACT CAR ENCODER CAR POSITION SENSOR CAR POSITION SENSOR B-SIDE LADDER CONTACT LOAD WEIGHING DEVICE ALARM BUZZER ON CAR ROOF OUT OF SERVICE SWITCH SERVICE DRIVE LIMIT SWITCH FIREMAN’S SWITCH DECELERATION SWITCH "UP" DECELERATION SWITCH "DOWN"

Issue

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

6

Designed by

Checked by

T.Hietala

PCM/Mauno Manninen

Dept.

H

5

Date

HAT

Language

30.05.2006

en Product code

Approved by

PCM/Ari Jokivalli

LCE

POSITION NUMBER TABLE Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

864841E00

Issue

Page

-

1/3

1

A


B

C

D

A4

E

F

G

2

3

4

82 84 85 87 88 89 90 93:N 93:U 96 96:EXT 96:EXT

SAFETY EDGE CONTACT DOOR OPERATOR DOOR MOTOR CAR DOOR CONTACT DOOR PHOTOCELL, TRANSMITTER DOOR PHOTOCELL, RECEIVER PHOTOCELL DEVICE ATTENDANT DOWN ATTENDANT UP CAR DISPLAY NEXT STOP INDICATOR DESTINATION INDICATOR

97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 112 113 115 116 117 118:B 118:E 119 120 121 122 123 124 125:1-2 126 127 133 136:UnA/B 136:NnA/B 137

ALARM RECEIVED LIGHT LOUDSPEAKER FOR ELEVATOR SPEECH UNIT OVERLOAD INDICATION INTERCOM DEVICE DESTINATION OPERATING PANEL PB,DC CALL BUTTONS DOWN CALL BUTTONS UP CALL BUTTONS FEB CALL BUTTONS FET CALL BUTTONS CARD READER STOP BUTTON PRL-H/HEL CALL SWITCH PRL-L CALL SWITCH OUT OF SERVICE SWITCH LOCKING SWITCH OTB BYPASS SWITCH OTB NORMAL/BYPASS SWITCH FPO/SGO SWITCH CONCEALED DOOR CONTACT SHAFT DOOR CONTACT SHAFT DOOR LOCK CONTACT TENSION WEIGHT CONTACT TENSION WEIGHT CONTACT BUFFER CONTACT SAFETY GEAR CONTACT FOR COUNTERWEIGHT OVERSPEED GOVERNOR CONTACT FIREMAN’S SWITCH EMERGENCY STOPPING SWITCH EMERGENCY STOPPING SWITCH BUTTON FOR SHAFT LIGHT

151:U 151:N 153 157 158 161 166 176 176:1-n 177:1-T

FINAL LIMIT SWITCH UP FINAL LIMIT SWITCH DOWN SLACK ROPE CONTACT SHAFT LIGHTING SOCKET IN SHAFT PIT IN USE LIGHT OUT OF SERVICE LIGHT CAR POS. INDICATOR AT FLOORS DESTINATION INDICATOR ELEVATOR IDENTIFIER

190 193 197 198

DERAILMENT CONTACT FIRE DETECTION AT LANDINGS FLOOR BOARD LCEFCB FLOOR BOARD LCEFOB

Issue

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

6

Designed by

Checked by

T.Hietala

PCM/Mauno Manninen

Dept.

H

5

Date

HAT

Language

30.05.2006

en Product code

Approved by

PCM/Ari Jokivalli

LCE


-

Drawing no.

864841E00

Issue

Page

-

2/3

1

A


B

C

D

E

2

3

4

201 209 227 228 239 251 267 268 270 270:U 270:N 270:RB 273 279 306 367 370:1 370:2 372 375 379 385:A1 385:A7 385:A8

AUXILIARY MAIN CONTACTOR BRAKE CONTACTOR EMERGENCY BATTERY REMOTE ALARM BOARD LCERAL CONTROL CURRENT TRANSFORMER POWER SUPPLY UNIT STOP BUTTON SHAFT LIGHTING SWITCH FOR RECALL DRIVE RECALL DRIVE BUTTON "UP" RECALL DRIVE BUTTON "DOWN" RECALL DRIVE BUTTON "RUN" THERMAL CONTACT DOOR ZONE INDICATION BRAKING RESISTOR I/O CONNECTION BOX LCEHKM PC-BOARD LCEAMAX PC-BOARD SWITCH MODULE CPU-BOARD LCECPU SAFETY CIRCUIT BOARD LCEADO DCBH MODULE, CPU BOARD DCBH MODULE, KDNTS BOARD DCBH MODULE, POWER BOARD

388:1-2 390 391 722 723 728:1-n 731 732 766 806 806:REC1 806:REC2

BRAKE CONTROL UNIT POWER MODULE RESISTOR MODULE EXPANSION BOARD LCEOPT POWER SUPPLY BOARD SPEED SUPERVISORY BOARD LCEETSL GATEWAY BOARD LCEGTW CAN-BOARD LCECAN ELEVATOR SPEECH UNIT CAR CONTROLLER BOARD LCECCBN2 POWER SUPPLY UNIT POWER SUPPLY UNIT

K443 K486 K487 K553

DOOR ZONE CONTACTOR SPEED MEASUREMENT CONTACTOR SUPERVISORY CONTACTOR ACCURATE LEVELLING RELAY

5

6

A4

KDH DRIVE PANEL -Z1 -K1 -K2 -A101 -K101 -L1 -U1 -U2 -Z2 -T10 -G1 -P1 =01-A1 =01-A2 =11-A1 =11-A2 -A9 -A10

F

G

RFI FILTER MAIN CONTACTOR CONTACTOR FUSE MONITOR CONTACTOR LINE FILTER UNIT CONVERTER UNIT INVERTER UNIT CHOKE TRANSFORMER RECTIFIER DISCHARGING BOARD DRIVE CONTROL UNIT DDCS COMMUNICATION OPTION MODULE DRIVE CONTROL UNIT DDCS COMMUNICATION OPTION MODULE MOTOR ENCODER INTERFACE RESOLVER INTERFACE Designed by

Checked by

T.Hietala

PCM/Mauno Manninen

Dept. Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Date

HAT

Language

30.05.2006

en Product code

Approved by

PCM/Ari Jokivalli

LCE


-

Drawing no.

864841E00

Issue

Page

-

3/3

1

2

3

MAINS + PE

TN-S

5

WHEN MAINS <10mm 2 2 nd PE MAINS -MAP PE

MAP

6

TN-C

DRIVE

2 PE mm 2 = MAINS mm

(MSW 5)

A

4

(MSW 4S)

MAP/ MAP/

CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY

220

CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY

L1

220 L1 B

L2

T1

L1

L3

T2

L2

T3

L3

MAINS 400V +10%/-15% 50-60Hz

MAINS 400V +10%/-15% 50-60Hz

T1

L1

L3

T2

L2

T3

L3

PEN PE

262 N

262

L

2

1

4

3

LIGHTING 1*16A/230V +10%/-15% 50-60Hz

PE C

MACHINE ROOM SHAFT X1/1

BMV_MU BMV_MU

F386:1

BMV_MU

X1/2 X1/3

N

386

2

1

4

3

385:A1

X2/1

XECO2/1

FILTER MODULE

BMV_MU

386:2

X2/2

XECO2/2

983633G**

983937G**

D

E

A4

Copyright C 2011 KONE Corporation

L2

230VAC 50-60Hz +10%/-15%

L1

1*16A

N

POWER SUPPLY TO GROUP CONTROL COMPUTER

SEE PAGE -E28 D2

PE

1343770G*

F

230VAC 50-60Hz +10%/-15%

L2

1*16A

N

POWER SUPPLY TO GROUP CONTROL COMPUTER

SEE PAGE -E28 G2

PE

1343770G*

G

DELIVERY LIMIT Designed by

Checked by

RAGESH.E.G Dept. Issue

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

HCE

Date

Language

K.MOHAN

en

Approved by

19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T

Comp. fam. codes

LCE

Title

ELECTRIFICATION

H

POWER SUPPLY Sales ref. no.

KONE Corporation

Drawing no.

350045814E01

Issue

-

Page

1

3

4

5

A

MAP

220:1 L1

L1 L2

L1 L2

395 KDA MODULE

L2 L3

385 DRIVE MODULE

K201/2 K201/4

K201/1 K201/3

K201/6

K201/5

L3 PE

PE

262/2 262/4

F10/2 F10/4

B

TO SHAFT LIGHTING

270 270 270:RB 1 2 3 4 5

274/L 290:1/2 N2 PE

L3 L2

XLH5 XLH1

1 3 5 7

FUSE MODULE X2 X1 1 3

1 3

X3

H157

1 2 4 5

A4

1 2

375:1 LOPCB

F

XL2 1 3

XL4 Bn Gn Ye Wh Bk

G

1 2 3 4 5

987085G*

1 2

1 2 3 4 6 7

1 2 3 4

1 2

LWI

XD1

XW

983383G0*

XM14 X4 1 2

XM16 1 2 3 4

XM17 1 2

XM3

XM25

1 3

1 2

SEP

XL8

XL1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

CAR LWI

XB50 3 2 1

3 2 1

SENSOR LWD Wh Ye Gn

375 X3 LCECPU

X5

SEE PAGE *E01-1/1

11:2

923992G0*

XW1

XBAT1

50032188*

1 3

11:1

775877G0*

1 2 4 5

1 3

923942G0*

4 6

XLG1

XD5

1 2 3 5 7

XM4

10:T

XBR2

XLD5 1 2

XH2

10:1-2 PREWIRED

1 3

379 LCE230/ LCEADO XM7 XD1

XM5

1:T 923943G0* MX14

XBR1

804639G0*

2 3

MX10/20

1 2

775876G0*

1 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3

XFB5

1374458G*

XL1 XL6

XAP1

1 2 3 4

1:T

XT1

1 2 3 4

1 2

XLH6 13 SEE PAGE *E01-1/1

1 2

XM25

7 9

E

X7

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2

780292G02

XLH3 13

XLH8

1 2

XRS1

XM16

959935G0*

1 2 3

379:1 LOP230

1 2 4 5

1 . . . 10

6:3

1 2 3 4 5 6

X6

XM17

XLH9 12 XLH2

D

1 2 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

1374472G*

XM5

C


L3 L2

XMEN5

1 2 3 4 5 6

XEIN1

239 POWER MODULE SEE E04

FOR SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

290:3

220:(L1) 220:(L2) 220:(L3)

723 LCEREC

SEE PAGE *E01-1/2

XMEN1

377 DCBG

1374475G*

220:(T1) 220:(T2) 220:(T3) PE

MACHINERY 923941G0* 1

U V W PE

L1 L2

1 2 3

1374471G* 1374476G*

L1 L2 L3

-LWI

1374477G*

6

987090G*

1374473G*

763656G1*

2

1

781681G*

OSG

1 2 3 4

Bk Gn Ye Wh Bn

127:1

XL5 1 2

LWD SENSOR 140

-LWI B

Added LOPCB reference to page 1

A

LWI added

Issue

Change description

2.4.2015

15/2012 Date

Designed by

ettessa

Dept.

JKa Des. by

Checked by

E.Riikonen / Jomine Appr. by

HAT

Date

2011-09-07

Language

J.Kantola

en

Approved by

Comp. fam. codes

J.Helvilä

LCE

Title

ELECTRIFICATION

H

MACHINERY, CONTROLLER AND MAP Sales ref. no.

KONE Corporation

Drawing no.

1374505E01

Issue

B-

Page

2/2

1

2

230VAC 50-60Hz

3

4

KGC CABINET KM1346008G01

A

5

LON ADAPTERS

6

SEE NEXT PAGES

L2

L N PE

KM860523C01

N2

E28

CONTROL PANEL

PE

L N PE

UPS:1 KM50026999

1

XG1:1 2

ACCESS SELECTION

KM860508G*/C01 E06

3 4

XG1B

732:1 L N PE

COM1

2 3 5

KM837059C01 E28

2 3 5

COM2

2 3 5

KM837059C02 E28

2 3 5


RJ45

X2

X2

1 2

1 2

731:2 LCEGTWO

LCECPU561 375

EIA-232

1 2 XG4A

KM837879G01

KGC:1 KM1343770G02 GROUP CONTROL COMPUTER

C

LCEGTWO 731:1

3 4

E06

XG1:2 21

B

XG1B

KM860506G*/C01

X1B

X1B

X1A

X1A

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

EIA-232 732:2

CONTROL PANEL LCECPU561 375

KM837879G01

XG5 1 2 3 4

LCEGTWO 731:1 LCEGTWO 731:2

KM713256G07 D

KM860536C01

KM860536C02 E28

KM860519C01 E28

E28

CONTROL PANEL

KM713256G07

120 Ohm./0.5W

2 1

XG4A 375 LCECPU561

120 Ohm./0.5W

LCEGTWO 731:1 1 2 3 4

E

1 2

1 2

X2

X2

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

X1B

X1B

X1A

X1A

A4

KGC:2 KM1343770G02

COM2

GROUP CONTROL COMPUTER RJ45

LCEGTWO 731:2

XG5

5 3 2

5 3 2

KM837059C02 E28

732:2 EIA-232

CONTROL PANEL LCECPU561 375

KM837879G01

COM1

L N PE

5 3 2

5 3 2

KM837059C01 E28

EIA-232

LCEGTWO 731:1

732:1 F

KM837879G01

LCEGTWO 731:2

KGC CABINET KM1346008G02

CONTROL PANEL

UPS:2 L N PE PE N L

PE

KM860523C01 E28

LCECPU561 375

N2 L2

KM50026999 G

LCEGTWO 731:1

LON ADAPTERS

LCEGTWO 731:2

230VAC 50-60Hz

B

KGC cabinets added

17.10.2011 J.Salo

A

Commomn Memory Network corrected

19.01.2007OP.Lignell

Issue

Change

Date

Des

Designer

Checker

Language

T.Hietala

PCM/Mauno Manninen

en

Approver

Product c.

Dept. Appr

Date

HAT

30.05.2006

PCM/Ari Jokivalli

LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

KGC - LON ADAPTERS - CONTROL PANEL Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

864842E01

Issue

Page

B

1/1

1

2

3

4

5

6

NETWORK 1

A

CONTROL PANEL 350045814 B

375 LCECPU561

120 Ohm 0,5W

XG4B 1 2

713256G0*/C02


XG4A

1 2

1 2

KCG:1/X1A

C

NETWORK 2

D

CONTROL PANEL 350045815 375 LCECPU561

E

CONTROL PANEL 350045816 713256G0*/C01

XG4B

1 2

A4

1 2

1 2

XG4A

375 LCECPU561

1 2

713256G0*/C02

XG4A

1 2

1 2

120 Ohm 0,5W

XG4B

1 2

KCG:1/X1B

F

G

Designer

Checker


Change

Date

Des

Appr

Date

HCE

Language

K.MOHAN

en

Approver


Product c.

LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

MACHINE ROOM Sales ref. no.

-

NETWORK

Draw. no.

Issue

350045814E01

-

Page

4

1

A

2

3

CONTROL PANEL

LCEGTWO 731:1


C

3

3

2

2

1

1

BR1

XG1A

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2 3 4

KGC

2

LON ADAPTER XG1:1

A4

E 3

3

2 1

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1 2

KGC

LON ADAPTER XG1:2

BR1

1-2 R=120ohm ON 2-3 R=120ohm OFF

LCEGTWO 731:2

XG1A

1 2 3 4

XG1A

+24V 0/24V

860508G0*/C01

3

BR2

LCEGTWO 731:2

1 2 3 4

1 2

3

BR2

XG1B

806500G0*/C01 1 2

+24V 0/24V

3


XG1B

+24V 0/24V

BR1

1 2 3 4

XG1B

1 2 3 4

3

BR1

XG1A

LCEGTWO 731:1

XG1A

1 2 3 4

806500G0*/C01

1 2 3 4

1

BR2

LCEGTWO 731:2

XG1A

+24V 0/24V

860506G0*/C01

1-2 R=120ohm ON (-KGC) 2-3 R=120ohm OFF (KGC)

D

1 2 3 4

1 2

350045816

KGC

LCEGTWO 731:1

XG1B

806500G0*/C01

6

CONTROL PANEL

350045815

KGC

XG1B

+24V 0/24V

5

CONTROL PANEL

350045814

B

4

XG1B

806500G0*/C01

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3 4

3

3

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

1

BR2

BR1

BR2

3

BR2


1-2 R=120ohm ON (-KGC) 2-3 R=120ohm OFF (KGC)

3

BR1


F

375 LCECPU561

XG3A 1 2

XG3B

1 2

G

713256G0*/C01 1 2

1 2

375 LCECPU561

XG3B

1 2

120 Ohm 0,5W

XG3A

1 2

120 Ohm 0,5W

713256G0*/C01 1 2

1 2

Designer Dept. Change

Date

Des

Appr

1 2

XG3B

1 2

Checker

RAGESH.E.G Issue

375 XG3A LCECPU561

Date

HCE

Language

K.MOHAN

en

Approver


Product c.

LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

MACHINE ROOM Sales ref. no.

-

NETWORK

Draw. no.

Issue

350045814E01

-

Page

5

1

2

3

SEE PAGE -E23 1/1 251 L

A

731

XH15

4 LCEGTWO

6

CONTROL PANEL

XS2 1 2 3 4 5 6

1

N

2

3

BK WH BK

E10/1

BN BU/GY GNYE

PE

806515G*/C01

SEP/ MAP

EZO

KM273136

-EZO

713800G0*

KM263918/KM283979 B

5

BK LCEGTWO

WH

XS1 XS2

BK

TX+

X3 1

WH

TX-

2

1 X2

TE

3

2

713800G0* 835629C01

197:T LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

198:T DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2

197:T-1 LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

198:T-1 DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2

C BN

L

BU/GY

N

GNYE

PE

251

+24V

L 0/24V

N PE

E10 713800G0*

BK LCEGTWO XS1

WH BK

TX+

X3 1

WH

TX-

2

1 X2

TE

3

2

XS2 835629C01 -EZO

D

197:* LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

BK

2xSUPPLY -2x SUPPLY

E

BN

L

BU/GY

N

GNYE

PE

251

EZO


BK

+24V

198:* DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2

L 0/24V

N PE

A4

806515G*/C01

713800G0* -EZO 835629C01

KM283329 835554G01 BK

F

120R

WH BK

BN BU/GY G

GNYE

LCEGTWO

XS1 XS2

TX+

X3 1

TX-

2

1 X2

TE

3

2

L N PE

251

+24V

L N

0/24V



197:1 LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

198:1 DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2

120R

4 6

PE 713863G01 Designer

Checker


Change

Date

Des

HCE

Appr

Date

Language

K.MOHAN

en

Approver


Product c.

LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

SEGMENTED SHAFT NETWORK Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

Issue

350045814E02

Page

-

1

1

2

3

4

MAP/ CONTROL PANEL PE

6

379:1

XLH7

A

5

1 3

781661G** 3

PE 1

3

5

2

P110

713806G01 B 122:T

P122 2 5 PE


3

C

713806G0* 122:2-(T-1)

P122 2

D

5 PE 3

E

713806G0* 122:1

P122

A4

2 5 PE 3

F

713242G01

713806G0* P122 2 5 PE

G

3

D

P122 -> P110

5/4/07

JKa

Designer

C

FRD EU rule added (page 3)

02/2/06

JKa

Dept.

Issue

Change

Date

Des

Checker

Appr

Date

ECC

Language

A. Jokivalli en

J.Kantola 17.05.2002

Approver

Product c.

P. Huotari

LCE

SHAFT ELECTRIFICATION H

SAFETY CHAIN Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

811850E02

Issue

Page

D

2/3

1

2

SEP A

MAP

722 LCEOPT

X5 8

3

4

CONTROL PANEL

H157

379:1 LOP230

XLH4

9

5

1

3

5

3

4

5

6

1 2 3 4 5

B) 885592G*

751279G0*

CEILING OF LIFT WELL

A) 777011G* A) 777012G*

728762G0*

1

B) 750267G*

B

157

A) WHEN HALOGEN B) NOT HALOGEN

B)

1

2 3 4 5

750267G* 1

C

A) 6.0m

1.5-2.0m 2 3 4 5

157 1

112:2

2 3 4 5

P112:2 2

n*6.0m

750267G*

1 1

D

2 3 4 5

157

753557G01

WSC


Max. 0.5m

2 3 4 5

1

112:1

P112:1 2

NOT INCLUDED

750267G*

6.0m

1 1

156

E

2 3 4 5

435

2345

157

P125:2

A4

3

EMH T -EEC S

2

- BFS P125:1

- BFS

3

1

2345

SHAFT LIGHT NOT INCLUDED 713865G0*

0.5m Max.

2

F

2

P123:1 -OSG W

125:2

112

P112:1

2

1

1

2

125:1

34

158

15

137 PE

-EMH T -EEC S

123:1

OSG W / EEC S ADDITIONAL DEVICES SEE *E02 1/1

G

773313G0*

WHEN FRD EU PIT +300mm

BOTTOM OF LIFT WELL D.2 D Issue

Alternative top shaft light added 11/2012 P122 -> P110 on page 2 Change

5/4/07 Date

Designer

JKa

JKa Des

Checker

Dept. Appr

Date

ECC

Language

A.Jokivalli en

J.Kantola

Approver

17.05.2002

Product c.

LCE

P.Huotari


SAFETY CHAIN AND LIGHTING Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

811850E02

Issue

Page

D

3/3

1

A

B

2

3

101:n DESTINATION OPERATING PANEL PROXIMITY SENSOR (GPIO) Vdd 1 50301205G01 S2 OUT 2 1 3 GND 2 Vdd 1 S1 OUT 2 3 3 GND

4

X5

1

1

2

2

3 4

3

1 2

USE

1

1

0/24V

2

4

0/24V

3

2

4

b

5

3

6

a

RS485 B ROLL CALL

I2C INTERFACE LCD BACKLIGHT

D

5

1

2

3

2

X13

RS485 A

1

2

3

3

1

4

4

24VDC

5

4

5

5 6

YE

2

YE

3

YE

6

BK

7

51026226G01

1

0/24V

2

4

0/24V

3

2

4

b

5

3

6

a

7

RS485 B

8

ROLL CALL

X11

YE YE YE

1

BK BK BK

BK

8

1

RS485 A

5

BK

2

A4

1

a

3

b

2

4

1

3

b

2

4

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

X2

1

RX

X10

51026203G01

a

GND

3

2 3

RTS

1

RS232 ACS INTERFACE

4

CTS

5 6 20

X3

20

1

A

KEYPAD

F

2

XS2

TX

E

3

12V_BKLED

4

1

4

(835629C01 -LAN)

3

1

5

XS2

4

50301206G01

6

2

4

LVDS INTERFACE


C

1

XS1

XS1 24VDC

LOCAL

TOUCH SCREEN & CONTROLLER

6

KDCTSDOP

X6

LOCKING Locally

5

KDCDAB

KDCKPD

X1

J1

1

1

12

12

X7

X4

1356781G03

RS485 ACS INTERFACE

2

B

LAN ETHERNET (CAT6)

1

RJ45 12

X8

VBUS

LOUDSPEAKER -

G

WH BN

50301208G01

WH BN

X12

D+

1

D-

2

GND

+

GND

H

Change

Date

Des

Appr

RD

3

GN

4

WH

5

BK

10

X8:1

50301209G01

USB

DRAIN

Designer

Checker

K.Sinisaari

A.Parviainen en

Dept. Issue

1

Approver

Date

ALTE

Language

2013-10-02

Product c.

M.Nevalainen LCE

ELECTRIFICATION LANDING CALLS AND SIGNALS Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

50301204E02

KDCTSDOP Issue

Page

-

1/1

1

2

3

4

5

6

DESTINATION OPERATING PANEL

101:n A

KDCMUL

KDCDOP

J1

DESTINATION INDICATOR


B

C

J5

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

4

4

4

4

5

5

5

5

772817G01

1

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

7

8

8

8

8

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

12

J9

LOCKING Locally

1 2

LOCAL

3

USE

4 D

J2

KEYPAD

E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

0

*

J7

1

1

2

4

3

2

4

b

5

3

6

a

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

3

3

3

XS2

4

4

4

4

1

1

5

5

2

4

6

6

3

2

7

4

b

8

5

3

6

a

5

5

6

6

7 8

A4

XS1

XS1

1356781G*

7

1

7

8

8

9

9

9

9

10

10

10

10

11

11

11

11

12

12

12

12

6

5

4

3

2

1

a

3

b

2

4

1

835629C*

a

3

b

2

4

1

6

5

4

3

2

1

XS2

F

J1

1 2

LOUDSPEAKER -

3 4

1356783G*

3

3

4

4

+

XMM3 G SD Card

. Issue

. Change

. Date

. Des

Appr

Designer

Checker

Language

K.Sinisaari

J.Åberg

en

Dept.

Approver

Product c.

Date

HCE

29.07.2011

J.Åberg

LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

LANDING CALLS AND SIGNALS Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

1356800E02

KDCDOP Issue

Page

-

1/1

A4 COPYRIGHT (C) 2006 KONE CORPORATION

350045814

A

B

E

F

G

Issue

Change

Date

LCEGTWO S1 LCEGTWO S2 LCEFCBG14 LCEFCBG15 DOPMUL: DOPMUL: DOPMUL: LCEGTWO S1 LCEGTWO S2 LCEFCBG14 LCEFCBG15 DOPMUL: DOPMUL: DOPMUL: LCEGTWO S1 LCEGTWO S2 LCEFCBG14 LCEFCBG15 DOPMUL: DOPMUL: DOPMUL: LCEGTWO S1 LCEGTWO S2 LCEFCBG14 LCEFCBG15 DOPMUL: DOPMUL: DOPMUL: LCEGTWO S1 LCEGTWO S2 LCEFCBG14 LCEFCBG15 DOPMUL: DOPMUL: DOPMUL:

350045815

LCEGTWO S1 LCEFCBG11

LCEGTWO S1 DOPMUL:2 DOPMUL:4

S1= SUPPLY 1 S2= SUPPLY 2 LCEGTWO S1 DOPMUL:1 DOPMUL:3

1 2 3

350045816

Des

4

LIFT 4

Dept.

Appr

HCE

Date

Sales ref. no.

-

5

LIFT 5 LIFT 6

Designer

RAGESH.E.G

Draw. no.

350045814E02

6

LIFT 7

Checker

K.MOHAN


Approver

Issue

-

LIFT 8

32 32

31 31

30 30

29 29

28 28

27 27

26 26

25 25

C 24 24

23 23

22 22

21 21

20 20

19 19

D 18 18

17 17

16 16

15 15

14 14

13 13

12 12

11 11

10 10

9 9

8 8

7 7

6 6

5

5

4

4

3

3

2

2

1

1

= BOARD

en

Language

Product c.

LCE

H

ELECTRIFICATION

SHAFT NETWORK ARRANGEMENT

Page

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

SEP/ CONTROL PANEL SEE PAGE -E02 1/1

A

375 LCECPU XH11

713868G01


B

C

D

806515C01

E

A4

713810G0* 176:2

MAIN FLOOR

139 1

XS1

F

XF2 XF3 XF4 XF1

2

197:2 LCEFCB XS2

4

713863G01

G

6

R

Designer

Checker


Change

Date

Des

Appr

Date

HCE

Language

K.MOHAN

en

Approver


Product c.

LCE


CALLS AND SIGNALS Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

350045814E02

Page

-

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

806 LCECCB* A

713859G0*

51

713203G0*

52 42:DS

XB1

42:U

XC11 375

XT1

XB2

713864G01

XC12 LCECPU

XT2

713856G0*

XC20 PE

XB12

42:N

CONTROL PANEL

PE XC1 379

XT3

713243G01

XC3 LCE230

XT4

B

XC4 XW

41

42:RB

X2/2

XB3

68:U

X2/1

728776G0*/713226G0*

G 61:U

XB22 G

-SLS


XB23

44:2

45

B41

713857G0*

B41

B41

XB4

XB25

-B41

728777G0*&779496G01 713202G0*

63:L 63:B 53

57 57

D

-57

713201G0*

43

713200G0*

44 68:U AMD/A- DOOR 87

D2/1

A4

84

X16 48

49

D1/5 D1/3 D1/4 X1/G X1/17 X1/16 X1/10 X1/30 X1/31 X1/SD X1/41 X1/+24 X15 X1/G 46 44 45 X2/13

4,6 3 2 5

1

88 89

88 89

77:S

SFD

713873G01

65

713867G01

227

-B87

B-SIDE 713359G0*

XB7

XB8

XB16

XB17

XO28 XI28

717 LCEABB

XB28

XB30

XI30 XO30

-LCEABB

762579G0*

XB31

804859G0*

804859G0*

B90

1 2 3 4 TX RX

45 44

1 2 3 4 TX RX

1

1).CURTAIN OF LIGHT

2). PHOTOCELL

2).PHOTOCELL

Dept. Appr

B89 B88

Checker Date

HCE

B89 B88

en

Approver

19.05.2015

1

Language

K.MOHAN

RAGESH.E.G Des

2

46

1). CURTAIN OF LIGHT

Date

D1/5 D1/3 B84 D1/4 X1/G X1/17 X1/16 X1/10 X1/30 X1/31 X1/SD X1/41 X1/+24 X15 X16 X1/G X2/13 45 44 46 49 48

7 1 9 8 10,11

-LCEABB XB29

B87

D2/1

4,6 3 2 5

983587G01

717 LCEABB

AMD/B-DOOR D2/2 D2/5

Designer

Change

77:N

713227G0*

XB14

983587G01

46 1

XB27 XB6 WHEN FRD RU SEE PAGE XB35 *E26 XB15 XB32

762579G0*

45 44

77:U

713227G0*

XB5

713359G0*

7 1 9 8 10,11

2

713227G0*

A-SIDE

90

Issue

30

XB45

D2/2 D2/5

E

XB26

728777G0*&779496G01

53

57

G

G

XB21

XB34 XB13

C

F

61:N

Product c.

NAVANEETHAN.T LCE

CAR ROOF ELECTRIFICATION H

AMD DRIVE 2 Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

350045814E03

Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

CAR 806 LCECCBN

A

3

4

5

6

CH

713815G* -CH

XB18

801119G*

KNXRIF(KRM) OR KNX99 OR XS1 X12 LCEALM

1375559G* 766: AUDIO

INDUCTION LOOP AMPLIFIER

ILS

801118G*

818923G* COP:2

COP:2 885908G*

B LCECOB CH

JM DIN1


X1 DESTINATION INDICATOR C

J10

JM DIN2 -TTC

X1 DESTINATION INDICATOR

100

J1

96

D

-ILS 772819G* ILS 50057251G*

J5

CAR POSITION INDICATOR

856300G* 772815G*

J8

J1

XMM3

J6

BUTTON BUS

ALARM INDICATION

Jumper

J11

772817G*

KDCCDM

-COP:2 -LCECOB

J3

32 KDCMUL:1

713810G*

96:EXT2

801047G*

J2

R=120ohm

713810G* 96:EXT1

LCECOB

J7

J2

J4

SD Card

KEYPAD 1356781G*

1

J1

1356782G*

804141G*

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

-

0

*

31:1

31:2

31:3

31:T

31:T-1

31:n

39

CALL BUTTONS

A4

E

44:1

F

FUNCTION BUTTONS KEY SWITCHES

G

Designer

K.Sinisaari Dept. Issue

Change

Date

Des

Appr

Date

29.07.2011

ALTE

Checker

Language

J.Åberg

en

Approver

Product c.

J.Åberg

LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

Car operating panel Sales ref. no.

-

COP:1

Draw. no.

1356801E03

Issue

Page

-

1/1

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

SEP

CAR TOP BOX

XC11


B

BLACK 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

C

BLACK 2

XT1

BLACK 3 BLACK 4

BLACK 1

BLACK 5

BLACK 2

BLACK 6

BLACK 3

BLACK 7

BLACK 4

BLACK 8

BLACK 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BLACK 6 BLACK 7 BLACK 8 GN-YE

14x0.75 mm2 + (NUMBERED 1 - 14 / BLACK) 1x1,5 mm2 + (GREEN-YELLOW) 2x0,5 mm2 + (SHIELDED PAIR / BLUE & WHITE) 2x0,5 mm2 (SHIELDED PAIR / ORANGE & WHITE)

Shield D

XC12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A4

E

GN-YE

713864G01 XT2

WHITE BLUE

WHITE

BLACK 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

BLUE

BLACK 10

BLACK 9

BLACK 11

BLACK 10

BLACK 12

BLACK 11

BLACK 13

BLACK 12

BLACK 14

BLACK 13 BLACK 14 WHITE ORANGE

F

XC20 1 2

WHITE ORANGE Shield

G

NOTE:REMOVE XC11/1 CONNECTION FOR ADDITIONAL CAR POWER SUPPLY Designer

Language

Checker

K.MOHAN


Change

Date

Des

Appr

Date

en

Approver

HCE 19.05.2015

Product c.

NAVANEETHAN.T LCE

ELECTRIFICATION H

Travelling cable I Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

350045814E03

Issue

Page

-

4

1

2

3

L1

L1

L1

T2

L2

L2

L2

T3

L3

F10

(N)/230V *E23 F1

L3

L3

1

2

L1

L1

3

4

L2

L2

MAP

379 LCE230

PE1

395 KDA K201/2 MODULE K201/4 K201/6

379:1 LOP230 XM5/5 XLH2/5

DOOR

6

220 T1

262/2

B

5

220:1

PE MAINS A 400V +10%/-15% 50-60Hz

4

F3/2A

XM5/1 XLH2/1

F2/2A

XM5/2 XLH2/2

230VAC

XLH3/3

F1/1A

F6/2A

X2/1

X1/3

F7/2A

X2/3

XLH1/4

XM5/4

XLH1/1

XM5/1

XLH1/2

XM5/2

400VAC

723 LCEREC

XM5/5

XLH1/5

XM5/4 XLH2/4

230VAC

X1/1

X3/1

239 1a

X3/3

1b X3/5

20VAC

3a 3b

XLH9/2

375

+

C

LCECPU

20V -

XM25/1

XM25/2

XM25/2

XM16/3

XM16/3

XM16/4

XM16/4

XM16/1

XM16/1

XM16/2

XM16/2

XM17/1

XM17/1

XM17/2

XM17/2

2a 20VAC 2b F5/4A

B

X3/9

+

XM25/1

SEE PAGE -E05

CONTROLLER

24V -

X3/7

+

XH2/3

X3/10 F4/4A

CAR

D

X3

X5

24V -

X3/8 F8/8A

+


A

230VAC

XLH9/1

SAFETY CHAIN

-E04/2 A1

SHAFT 24V X4 -

XLD5/1 XD1/5

201:3

XD5/9

XLD5/2 A2

377 DCBG 395 KDA MODULE

201:4 A1

A4

MFAN OUT

XD1

E

OUTPUT FROM SW. MAIN RELAY

XD1/7

4 XFB5/1 XFB5/2

10 FAN ( OPTIONAL ) 1

A1

SAFETY CHAIN

3

A2

XD5/10

GND 24V MC INPUT

1(A2)

5(A1)

XF1/2 XMS1/1

44(54) 43(53)

XRD/3

N’

XS3/2

L’

XS3/1

N’

XB11/2

L RFI L’

XB11/1

N L

XRD/2

387:1 RFI

N

N/230VAC XD1/2

XD5/2

201:3 3(43)

START PERMIT SW

230VAC XD1/1

XD5/1

4(44)

XD1/3

XD5/3

1(13)

4(44)

201:3 22

22

14

22

21

X8/2 MAIN CONTACTOR X8/3 CONTROL

21

X4/1 MAIN CONTACTOR X4/2 STATUS X4/3 PWM ENABLE

5(33)

33(83)

34(84)

K201

Designed by

Checked by

E.Riikonen / Jomine A Issue

XD4 removed, F2/2A Change description

20.4.-12 JKa Date

Des. by

SEE PAGE -E04 2/2 D5

385 DRIVE MODULE 367 I/O BOARD

201:3

6(34) 6(34)

5(33)

13

1(13)

201:4

201:4 G

2(14)


3(43)

201:4

2(14)

21

387:2

201:4

201:3

388 BCX08

A1 SEE PAGE A2 K201 -E04 2/2 B2

XRD/1

F

MACHINERY

XMS1/2

XRD/4

392 MCCB2

N/230VAC

K219

XF1/1

Dept. Appr. by

HAT

Date

2011-09-19

Language

J.Kantola

en

Approved by

Comp. fam. codes

J.Helvilä

LCE

Title

DRIVE MODULE

H

KDM Sales ref. no.

KONE Corporation

Drawing no.

1374506E04

Issue

A

Page

1/2

MAP

3

395 KDA MODULE

-E04/1 A6 220/L1(220:1/L1) 220/L2(220:1/L2) 220/L3(220:1/L3)

62

61

72

71

2

1

4

3

6

5

2

1

X20 1

4

3

2

C

K201

XM14

DC

12V

BAT 12V

0/12V

2

2

GND

367 I/O BOARD

XLG1

1

1

2

2

TACHO OUT+

ENC PWR ENCODER A+ ENCODER AENCODER B+ ENCODER BGND ENC

A4

6:3 ENCODER

A B C D E F

RS485 A RS485 B

X7 1 2

388 BCX08

379 BUP2 XPB4 1 2 3

+24V GND

FRD UK,EN,HK, LPS VN

XAP1 1 2 3 4

24VDC IN 24VDC OUT GND

PAGE -E04 1/2 F6

FRD UK/EN/HK, LPS VN

-FRD UK/EN/HK, LPS VN

XB11 PAGE -E04 1/2 F6

MACHINERY

TR1

2

XBR4

15V

230V

1

2

D1

1

XS3

BR1

XBR1

2

K1

2

1

11:1

200V

XB1 GND BRAKE ENABLE BRAKE FB1 BRAKE CTRL2 BRAKE V RED1 BRAKE CTRL1 BRAKE FB2 BRAKE V RED1 DRIVE ENABLE GND

1 2 3 4 5 6

X6 1 2

2 5

XAP1

E

XMEN5

+15V A+ AB+ BGND

1 2 3 4 5 6

XRS1

TACHO OUT-

+15V

XMEN1

1 2 3 4 5 6

RS485 A RS485 B

D

W PE

XEIN1

377 DCBG

XL6

1 2 3 4

V AC

XBAT1

MAP

HOISTING MOTOR

U

1

24VDC/IN GND 15VDC/IN GND

MACHINERY

PE

SEE PAGE -E04 1/2 E4

ENCODER SIGNAL


DC

L3

1

375:1 LOPCB

330

AC

L2

B

375 LCECPUnc

6

L1

PE PE

5

385 DRIVE MODULE

F298 A

4

KR7

2

KR7

1

XB1

5 4 2 6 3 1 7 8 9 10

4 6 3 2 5 9 1 7 8 10

Q2

I(Q2)

1

1

3

I(Q2)

K2 K1

K2

Q4

I(Q4)

BR2

XBR2

3

4

4

2

6

1

200V 11:2

I(Q4)

F

PTC IN TGND NTC IN

XT1

MX10/MX20

1

MX10/MX20

2

MX14

3

MX14

XW

XW1 24V WEIGHT+

G

WEIGHTGND

SEP

6

1:T

1:T

2

LWD XB50

1

3

1

1

2

2

2

2

3

1

3

3

BN

64

BU BK

4 Designed by

Checked by

Dept. Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

HCE

Date

Language

K.MOHAN

RAGESH.E.G Issue

THERMISTORS

1

CAR

XW

5

19.05.2015

en

Approved by

NAVANEETHAN.T

Comp. fam. codes

LCE

Title

DRIVE MODULE

H

KDM Sales ref. no.

KONE Corporation

Drawing no.

350045814E04

Issue

-

Page

2

1

2

SHAFT

-153 153

3

4

5

MAP

-121:E

F2/2A(MX10) F1/1A F2/6,3A(MX20) XLH1/1

XLH3/3

A

6

121:E

112:2

-121:E 121:P

-112:2 123:1

112:1

B

XLH4/3

-155 125:1

125:2

-125:3

-125:2

POWER SUPPLY 230VAC

763610G**

XLH4/1

270:RB -121:P 125:3

379:1 LOP230

XLH4/5

155

E04-1/C3

XLH1/2

XLH3/1

2

270

XLH5/7

1 5

6

1

2

XLH5/5 XLH5/1

-125:1

XLH5/3 XL8/1 RESET (not in use) XL8/2

test 4

C

NORMAL

XL8/3

TEST

XL8/4

XLH6/1

0/24V

XLH8/7

375:1 LOPCB

XLH8/9

763600G01

127 1

XLH2/2

2

CAR

XT4/3

XB1/3

51

XB1/1 XB2/3

52

D

XLH6/3

test

XB2/1 XB3/5

41

42:DS

806 LCECCB*

XM3/3

713710G11/ 802850G11/ 802890G11

XM4/3

XB3/1

4

53

A4

63:B -63:L

-53 87

-57

XB40/1 XT4/5

XB6/1

XB7/2

F

B87

XT5/3

XB8/4 XB8/2

XT4/7

122:T-1

COD SOD COD

122:2 121:T-1

121:1 122:T

SOD

G

COD SOD COD

122:1

XLH7/1

121:T

XLH7/3

379:1 LOP230

C Issue

125:3 added Change

XLH8/1

XH2/1

XLH8/3

XH2/3

JKa

Date

Des

Designer

R=0 ohm. INPUT 3

OUTPUT FROM SW. MAIN RELAY

TO MAIN CONTACTOR Checker

J.Kantola Dept. Appr

INPUT 2 CAR DOOR CONTACT INPUT TO SW.

XD1/5 XD1/7 -E04,1/F2

35/04

INPUT 1

STOP CONTACT INPUT TO SW.

SHAFT DOOR CONTACT INPUT TO SW.

763610G**

SOD

LCECCBN* connection added 15/04/05 JKa

22

X5/24,25 5B6 0/24V

713160G02

XC1/9

MAP

SHAFT D

21

XC1/7

-B87 121:2

3

XC1/5

XT5/5

CCB CCB CCBN

XB7/4

K487

379 LCEADO

XB5/1 XB6/3

57

-FRD CS 57

XB40/2

CCBN

13

WHEN FRD RU SEE PAGE *E26

XT4/1

XB5/3

K443-2

13 14

K553

ADO/ACL

-B41

13 14

XB12H/1

XB4/1

63:L

14

K443-1

XC1/1

CCBN

XB4/3

B41

-E14

K486

XC1/3

XB12H/2

E

SEE PAGE

XM4/1

CCB

42:N 42:U

ADO/ACL- CIRCUIT

XM3/1

XT4/1

XB3/3

42:RB

XM5/2

ADO/ACL


6

+24V

Date

Approver

17.05.2002

ECC

Language

A. Jokivalli en Product c.

P. Huotari

LCE

SAFETY CHAIN H Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

811852E05

Page

D

1

1

2

3

option Box 367 A

722:1 LCEOPT X5 FRD


FID1 FID2 EPD1 GND

722:2 LCEOPT 2 1 0

FRD

1 2 3 4 10

FID1 FID2 EPD1 GND

EPD SIGNAL EPS G -EPS S

OPT1

WH BN GN YE GY

751288G0*

722:2 LCEOPT

S1

C

751288G0* WH BN GN YE GY PK BU RD

X5

1 0 F

FID M

WH BN GN YE GY

LIFT-3 350045816

S1

FID B/S

1 2 3 4 10

S1

2 1 0

PK BU RD

X5 1 7 8

EAQ FIDA1 FIDA2

6

option Box 367

722:1 LCEOPT

FRD

S1 B

5

option Box 367 LIFT-2 350045815

LIFT-1 350045814

1 0 F

4

X5

EAQ FID A FID A

PK BU RD

1 7 8

EAQ FIDA1 FIDA2

722:1 LCEOPT

WH BN GN YE GY

S1

X5

1 0 F

FRD

1 2 3 4 10

FID1 FID2 EPD1 GND

722:2 LCEOPT

OPT1

S1 2 1 0

X5 PK BU RD

1 7 8

EAQ FIDA1 FIDA2

D

Controller

Controller 2X0,34

XC20

KRM KNX M

XC20 1 2

1 2

Controller 2X0,34

KRM KNX M

XC20 1 2

KRM KNX M

A4

E

Option BOX

SEP 375 LCECPU561

F

+24V 0/24V TX+ RS485

TXRX+ RX-

G

XM13

713381G01

XM13A 1

1

2

2

2

3

3

3

4

4

4

5

5

5

6

6

6

Checker

RAGESH.E.G Dept.

H

Change

XM13B 713370G01

1

Designer

Issue

722 LCEOPT

Date

Des

Appr

Date

19.05.2015

HCE

Language

K.MOHAN

en

Approver

Product c.

NAVANEETHAN.T

LCE

OPTIONAL PC-BOARD WIRING Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

350045814E06

Page

-

1

1

A

2

3

4

375 LCECPU561

PE

B

1 2 3 4 5 6

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3

SERIAL NET SERIAL NET

XG4A NETWORK 1 1 KGC 2 KGC

KGC:1 X1A

TX+ TXTE

1 2

1 2


N

0/24V PE

1 2 3 4 5 6

TX+ TXTE

1 2 3

+24VE 0/24VE TX+ TX-

XG1A 1 2 3 4

123 BR1

KGC BR2 123

XG1:1

XG4B

+24V

1 2

230VAC

L

XH15

LON ADAPTER MODULE 1

1 2

251

XS2

+24VE 0/24VE 0/24VE TXRoll Call TX+

SEE PAGE -E28

120 Ohm./0.5W

XG3A 1 2

+24VE 0/24VE

Roll Call

X3 1 2


731:1 LCEGTWO X2

XS1

1 2 3 4 5 6

XG3B

C

6

LIFT-1 350045814 XH12

+24V 0/24V RS485 TX+ TXRoll Call

5

KGC KGC

XG1B 1 2 3 4

120 Ohm./0.5W

731:2 LCEGTWO X2

XS1 1 2 3 4 5 6

D

+24V 0/24V

+24VE 0/24VE

XS2

Roll Call

X3 1 2 3

TX+ TXTE

1 2


1 2 3 4 5 6

SEE PAGE -E10

XH15 TX+ TXTE

123

E

1 2 3

BR1

KGC BR2

123

A4

XG1B XG1:2 1 2

KGC KGC

XG1A

1 2 3 4

+24VE 0/24VE TX+ TX-

1 2 3 4

F

SEE PAGE 3 A3 LIFT-2

G

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by HCE 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE GROUP CONNECTIONS NETWORK 1 2xLCEGTWO Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E06

Issue

Page

-

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

SEE PAGE 2 G3 LIFT -1

A

375 LCECPU561

LIFT-2 350045815 PE

B +24V 0/24V RS485 TX+ TXRoll Call

731:1 LCEGTWO X2

XS1

XH12 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3

SERIAL NET

C


230VAC

L


N

0/24V PE

1 2 3 4 5 6

XH15 TX+ TXTE

1 2 3

1 2

1 2

D

TX+ TXTE

XG3A

XG4A

SERIAL NET


1 2

+24V

1 2

XS2

Roll Call

X3 XG3B

+24VE 0/24VE

251

BR1 BR2

KGC:1 X1B NETWORK 2 1 KGC 2 KGC

1 2 3

XG1B 1 2 3 4

1 2 3

XG1A +24VE 0/24VE TX+ TX-

1 2 3 4

XG4B 1 2

XS1 1 2 3 4 5 6

731:2 LCEGTWO X2 +24V 0/24V

1 2 3

TX+ TXTE

1 2

XS2

Roll Call

X3 E

+24VE 0/24VE


1 2 3 4 5 6

SEE PAGE -E10

XH15 TX+ TXTE

A4

1 2 3

BR1 BR2 XG1B

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

F

1 2 3


1 2 3 4

G


Issue

H

Change description


Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G Dept. Date HCE 19.05.2015 GROUP CONNECTIONS NETWORK 1

K.MOHAN Approved by NAVANEETHAN.T

Product code

Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E06

en LCE

2xLCEGTWO Issue

Page

-

3

1

2

SEE PAGE 3 G2 LIFT-2

A

3

4

5

6

SEE PAGE 3 G3 LIFT-2

LIFT-3 350045816

375 LCECPU561

PE B +24V 0/24V RS485 TX+ TXRoll Call

731:1 LCEGTWO X2

XS1

XH12 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3

SERIAL NET

C


1 2

230VAC

L


N

0/24V PE

1 2 3 4 5 6

XH15 TX+ TXTE

1 2 3

1 2

BR1 BR2

120 Ohm. 0.5W

1 2 3

XG1B 1 2 3 4

1 2

D

TX+ TXTE

XG3A

XG4A

SERIAL NET


1 2

+24V

XS2

Roll Call

X3 XG3B

+24VE 0/24VE

251

1 2 3


1 2 3 4

XG4B 1 2

120 Ohm./0.5W

731:2 LCEGTWO X2

XS1 1 2 3 4 5 6

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3

TX+ TXTE

1 2

XS2

Roll Call

X3 E

+24VE 0/24VE


1 2 3 4 5 6

SEE PAGE -E10

XH15 TX+ TXTE

A4

1 2 3

BR1 BR2 XG1B

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

F

1 2 3


1 2 3 4

G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G Dept. Date 19.05.2015 GROUP CONNECTIONS NETWORK 2

K.MOHAN Approved by NAVANEETHAN.T

Product code

Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E06

en LCE

2xLCEGTWO Issue

Page

-

4

1

2

CAR

3

806

61:U

LCECCBN* +24V

XB22/4

A

4

F1

+15V

1A

5

6

XT3/3

XC3/4

XM5/5

XT3/4

XC3/5

XM5/4

XB51/1

806:REC1

379 LCEADO

N

61:N

230VAC

XB51/2

XB23/4

-E04 1/2 B2

230VAC

L

+24VDC

GND

XB52/2

-/24V XB21/4

24VDC

XB52/1

F5

30

+24V

4A

B30 B

XB24/4

B-SIDE

375

R 77:U

0/12Vbatt

R 77:N


77:S

XB27/2

SFD

77:S XB27/1

C 68:U

+24VDC SERVICE LIMIT

XB45/2

68:U

-68:U

LCECPUnc

-/24

XT1/2

XC11/2

XT1/5

XC11/5

61:U

XT1/6

XC11/6

61:N

XT1/3

XC11/3

30

XT1/4

XC11/4

B30

XT1/7

XC11/7

77:U

XT1/8

XC11/8

77:N

XT2/4

XC12/4

-E04 1/2 D3

SW.

GND

XB45/1

42:N

INS. DOWN

42:U

INS. UP

0/12Vbatt

D 42:DS

RS485 INSPECTION HAS

XB12N/1 XT6/2

INSPECTION

XT6/1

E +24VDC

F

77:N

XL1/1

XL1/1

LOP24V

GND

XL1/2

XL1/2

LOP0V

TX

XL1/3

XL1/3

RXD

RX

XL1/4

XL1/4

TXD

XL1/11

XL1/11

XL1/12

XL1/12

F1/1.85A

A4

+24VDC

+12Vbatt

MAP

77:U

XL1/10

279

+12Vbatt

0/12Vbatt

7

XL1/10

XL1/9

XL1/9

XL1/8

XL1/8

XL2/1

XL1/5

XL1/5

270 XL2/2

270:N

XL1/7

XL1/7

270:U

XL1/6

8

GND

DRIVE

RDF

DOWN

RDF

UP

SW.

Checker

J.Kantola Dept. Change

RDF

LOPCB Designer

Issue

+12Vbatt

XL1/6

G

375:1

SI2/0.5A

Date

Des

Appr

Date

Approver

19.05.2005

LCM

Language


P. Huotari

LCE

CONTROL MODULE H Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

861393E07

Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

3

CAR A X12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

B

KNXRIF OR KNX99 OR LCEALM

4

XS1/1

XB18/1

XS1/2

XB18/2

XS1/3

XB18/3

XS1/6

Emergency light 0/24V

XT1/2

XC11/2

0/24V

XB18/6

XT2/1

XC12/1

TX+

XS1/4

XB18/4

XT2/2

XC12/2

TX- RS485

XS1/5

XB18/5

XS1/7

XB18/7

XS1/8

XB18/8

XS1/9

XB18/9

+12V Help is coming Intercom XS1/10 XB18/10 Intercom

See page - E23 B3


KDCMUL:1 J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

SPI1_SCK SPI1_MOSI SPI1_MISO SPI1_EN1 SPI1_EN2 LED_CLK

J8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

E

801047G01

A4

OR COP2 J2/ -E08 2C2 NEXT STOP INDICATOR

KDCDIN 96:EXT F

X1 1 2 3 4 5

KDCDIN 96:EXT

X1 1 2 3 4 5

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6

J4 Alarm_NC TestAlarm AlarmLED

SI1

J10

Help coming Voice conn.

F2KALM

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

+12VBatt Alarm_NC TestAlarm Emergency Light AlarmLED GND

SPI Select 1 SPI Clock 1 SPI Data 1

1 2 3 4

Microphone

J11

J6

A-SIDE

1 2 3 4 5

100

J1

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut

SPI Select 2 SPI Clock 2 SPI Data 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BusDataIn BusClock

G

COP:1

See page - E09 A2

Issue

Change

39

0.5A

1 2 3 4 5

Loudspeaker Loudspeaker

NEXT STOP INDICATOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6

REED_SW

KDCCDM 96

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

+5V

J3

R=120ohm/0.5W

-E04 1/3 G4

Alarm

J2

Termination resistor

375 LCECPU561

+24V - E07 A3

32

D

6

806 LCECCBN*

See page - E24

C

5

Date

Des

Appr

Designer

Checker

Language

K.Sinisaari

J.Åberg

en

Dept.

Approver

Product c.

Date

30.05.2011

ALTE

J.Åberg

LCE

SIGNALS IN CAR H

COP:1 Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

1356801E08

Issue

Page

-

1/1

1

2

COPMUL/ F2KMUL

A

3

4

BusDataIn BusClock GND

6

COP

See page - E08 J6 F4 or J8 J6 BusSelect +15V BusDataOut

5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CALL BUTTONS 31:1

B

F2KKIB BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND

J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


CALL BUTTON

31:3

C


J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


D

J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


A4

E

J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

31:6

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND CALL BUTTON

CALL BUTTON

31:n+1

31:4


CALL BUTTON

31:5

31:2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

31:n


CALL BUTTON

FUNCTION BUTTONS KEY SWITCHES F

F2KKIB BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND FUNCTION BUTTON

G

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Change

Date

Des

Appr

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND FUNCTION BUTTON

Designer

Checker

Language

T.Hietala

PCM/Mauno Manninen

en

Approver

Product c.

Dept. Issue

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Date

HAT

30.05.2006

PCM/Ari Jokivalli

LCE

SIGNALS IN CAR H

COP Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

864841E09

Issue

Page

-

1/1

1

2

230V N/230V PE

A

XH15

4

5

1 * 230V 50-60Hz SEE PAGE -E06 1/1

251

390 1 2 3

3

6

SEE PAGE -E06

731:1 LCEGTWO XH15 XS2

POWER MODULE

1 2 3 4 5 6

731:2 LCEGTWO

XS2

XH15 XS2

B

197:T LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

198:T DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2

197:T-1 LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

198:T-1 DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2






EZO

-EZO

SHAFT

C

D

806510G03 SHAFT NETWORK MODULE

E

251

LCEGTWO

230V N/230V PE

A4

X2 24VDC 0/24V

1 2

24VDC 0/24V 0/24V RS485 B ROLL CALL RS485 A

XS1 1 2 3 4 5 6

XS2 X3 1 RS485 A 2 RS485 B 3 TE

F

G


1 2 3 4 5 6

SEE PAGE 2/2 A1

SEE PAGE 2/2 A4 Designed by

Checker


Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Date

19.05.2015

HCE

Language

K.MOHAN Approver

Product code

NAVANEETHAN.T

en LCE

LANDING CALLS AND SIGNALS H

POWER SUPPLY

SEGMENTED SHAFT NETWORK

Drawing no.

Sales ref. no.

-

350045814E10

Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

3

4

SEE PAGE OR SEE PAGE 1/2 G1 864841E10 1/1 F2

SHAFT


251

B

LCEGTWO

230V N/230V PE

X2 24VDC 0/24V

1 2

24VDC 0/24V 0/24V RS485 B ROLL CALL RS485 A 24VDC 0/24V 0/24V RS485 B ROLL CALL RS485 A

1 RS485 A 2 RS485 B 3 TE








1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

-EZO

EZO


X3

197:* LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2 XS1

XS2

C

6

SEE PAGE 1/2 G4

2xSUPPLY

-2x SUPPLY -2x SUPPLY -2x SUPPLY

A

5

D


251

LCEGTWO

230V N/230V PE

X2

E 24VDC 0/24V

1 2


XS1 1 2 3 4 5 6

A4

XS2 X3 1 RS485 A 2 RS485 B 3 TE


1 2 3 4 5 6

120R

F

197:1 LCEFCBG11 XS1 XS2

198:1 DOPMUL/ KDCMUL XS1 XS2

4

120R

6

G

Designed by

Checker


Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Language

K.MOHAN

Date

Approver

19.05.2015

Product code

NAVANEETHAN.T LANDING CALLS AND SIGNALS HCE

en LCE

H

POWER SUPPLY Sales ref. no.

SEGMENTED SHAFT NETWORK Drawing no.

-

350045814E10

Issue

Page

-

2

1

2

3

4

101:1-T DOP 1 2 3 4

Vdd OUT GND

S1

SEE PAGE 864852E10 OR 864853E10

X5

OUT GND

LOCKING

5V SW INPUT2 SW INPUT1 GND

XS1

X6

+24V 0/24V

1

B 2

1 2 3 5

GND

-SMD

X13

TOUCH SCREEN & CONTROLLER I2C INTERFACE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5

C

LCD BACKLIGHT

1 2 3 6 7 8

+/24VDC 0/24V 0/24V ROLL CALL

4 RS485 B 6 RS485 A

33V-1,5A


6

KDCTSDOP

PROXIMITY SENSOR Vdd S2

A

5

XS2

5V

1 2 3 5

TP_INTERRUPT GND


4 RS485 B 6 RS485 A

X11 1 2 3 4

12V_BKLED GND

X10

D

LVDS INTERFACE

E

A4

KEYPAD KDCDAB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

KDCKPD

X1

J1

LVDS0_TX0_N LVDS0_TX0_P LVDS0_TX1_N LVDS0_TX1_P LVDS0_TX2_N LVDS0_TX2_P GND LVDS0_CLK_N RS232_RX LVDS0_CLK_P RS232_TX FRC RS232_RTS LVDS0_TX3_N RS232_CTS LVDS0_TX3_P AMODE GND PWM_DIM/DPS

X2

RS485_A RS485_B

X4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6

ACS RS232

1 2

ACS RS485

X7 KEY_COL0 KEY_COL1 KEY_COL2 KEY_ROW0 KEY_ROW1 KEY_ROW2 KEY_ROW3 KEY_ROW4

1 2

-

5V EXT_USB5V USB_OTG_DP USB_OTG_DN

USB_H1_DP USB_H1_DN GND

+

LAN ETHERNET (CAT6)

RJ45

5V

X12

LOUDSPEAKER

G

SEE PAGE 864852E10 OR 864853E10

+3.2V DPS

X3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

F

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

X8

X8:1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 SHELL USB FEMALE TYPE A

+

Designer

Checker

K.Sinisaari

A.Parviainen en

Dept. Issue

Change

Date

Des

Appr

Approver

Date

HCE

Language

2013-05-07

Product c.

M.Nevalainen LCE


KDCTSDOP Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

50301204E10

Issue

Page

-

1/1

1

101:1-T

2

3

4

5

6

DOP

SEE PAGE 864842E10 OR 864843E10

A

KDCMUL

KDCDOP DESTINATION INDICATOR

J1

B

XS1

J5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

+24V 0/24V

+5V

1 2 3 5

4 RS485 B 6 RS485 A

XS2 1 2 3 5

GND


LOCKING Locally J9

C

J2

J7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

31:n D

GND


4 RS485 B 6 RS485 A

SI4

0,5A

+24V 1 0/24V 2 3 Locking 4

KEYPAD


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

+5V

SEE PAGE 864842E10 OR 864843E10

GND

J1 LOUDSPEAKER

+

A4

E

1 2 3 4

J6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut BusDataIn

F

BusClock GND

SEE PAGE E10/5

XMM3

SD Card

G

Designer

Checker


Change

Date

Des

Appr

Language

K.MOHAN

Date

19.05.2015

en

Approver

Product c.

NAVANEETHAN.T LANDING CALLS AND SIGNALS HCE

LCE

H

KDCMUL Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

350045814E10

Issue

Page

-

4

1

2

See page COPMUL/ - E10/4 F2KMUL/ KDCMUL BusSelect +15V

A

BusDataOut BusDataIn BusClock GND

3

4

5

6

J6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CALL BUTTONS 31:1

B


J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


CALL BUTTON

31:3

C


J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


D

J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


A4

E

J1

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

31:6


CALL BUTTON

31:n+1

31:4


CALL BUTTON

31:5

31:2


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

31:n


CALL BUTTON

FUNCTION BUTTONS KEY SWITCHES F

F2KKIB BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND FUNCTION BUTTON

G

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Designer Dept. Change

Date

Des

Appr

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND FUNCTION BUTTON

Checker

RAGESH.E.G Issue

F2KKIB

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Date

HCE

Language

K.MOHAN

19.05.2015

en

Approver

Product c.

NAVANEETHAN.T

LCE


KDCMUL Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

Issue

350045814E10

Page

-

5

1

2

3

4

TOPMOST FLOOR F2KH7S 176:T

A

+24V ChipSelect Clock DataIn GND

+24V LED1 BUT1 LED2 BUT2 GND

B 116:T

J2

166:T

J2

1 2


103:2-(T-1)

J3

J1 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3

J2

1 2

+15V LED2 BUT2 GND

XF2

J1

1 2 3 4 5

F2KFB1 J2 +24V LED1 BUT1

1 2 3 4 5 6

A4


166:1

XF1

+24V

1 2 3 4 5 6

XS2 1 2 3 5

0/24V

4 6

XF2

J1

1 2 3 4 5

F2KFB1 J2

197:1 LCEFCB

1 2 3 4 5

+24V

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3

J2

1 2

1 2 3 5

0/24V

4 6

1 2 3

XF4

F2KFB1

1 2 Designer

Checker

J.Kantola Dept. Issue

Change

1 2 3 5

XS2

XF3

J2

XS1

4 6

XF1

1 2 3 4 5 6

F2KKS2 G

1 2 3 5

1 2

F2KH7S 176:1

116:1

XS1

4 6

1 2 3

LOWERMOST FLOOR

+24V LED1 BUT1 LED2 BUT2 GND

197:2-(T-1) LCEFCB

1 2 3 4 5

XF4

F2KFB1

104:1

4 6

XF3

J2

F2KKS2

F

1 2 3 5

0/24V

1 2

103:4-(T-1)

F2KFB2

E

XS2

1 2 3


166:2-(T-1)

+24V

1 2 3 4 5 6

F2KH7S 176:2-(T-1)

116:2-(T-1)

1 3 2 5 6 4

XF1

INTERMEDIATE FLOORS

+15V LED2 BUT2 GND

XS1

XF4

F2KFB1

D

197:T LCEFCB

1 2 3 4 5

XF3 1 2 3

F2KKS2

C

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

J2

6

XF2

J1

F2KFB1

103:T

5

Date

Des

Appr

Date

Approver

15.04.2005

LCM

Language


P. Huotari

LCE


(FC) KSS Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

861397E10

Page

-

1/1

1

2

-E04 1/2 C2

4

5

CAR

-E04 PE 1/2 A/2 1/2 B/4

A

3

84

D1/5 3

PE

XM5/5

XC3/4

XT3/3

XM5/4

XC3/5

XT3/4

S2

X9

1 2

806 LCECCBN* 230VAC

B

XB16/2

D1/4

XB16/1

D1/3

X19 OFF PC1 2 PC2 MSE1 1 MSE2 SP0 SP1 OFL RAIL1 X1

S1 ON

1 2 3 4

X6

1 2

X4

1 2 3

85

X10

XB28/1

INSPECTION

6

NTC

SD SERVICE

K5

XB28/2

K6

XB28/4

16 OPEN

G

17 CLOSE XB28/5

VCC

RS485 XB28/7 10 OPEN END PHOTOCELL

XB29/2

DOOR PANEL

X12

41


XB28/9 31

C

REOPEN

X13

POSITION REFERENCE X17 MSE1 38 SAFETY EDGE MSE1 GND

XB28/8 30

BR1

XB28/6

1 2 3 4

G

0/24V

G

0/24V

XB29/3 XB29/4

X18 MSE2 39 MSE2 SAFETY EDGE GND

XB29/1 +24 +24V X2

X16 +24V 49

1

0/24V 48

1

X15 +24V 45 44 0/24V 46

1 1 1

13 SAFETY EDGE

D

9

82:1

CLOSE END

WHEN LCEABB See page 989624E16

2 2 2

90 E

1 4 3 2

82:2

89

88

89

88

TX

A4

RX 1). CURTAIN OF LIGHT 2). PHOTOCELL

F

375 LCECPU +24V -E04 D3

-E04 D3

RS485

G

0/24V

XC11/2

XT1/2

TX+

XC12/1

XT2/1

TX-

XC12/2

XT2/2

0/24V

RS485

Designer

Checker

J.Kantola A Issue

LCEABB reference added Change

50/08

JPa

Date

Des

Dept. Appr

Approver

Date

03.12.2004

LCM

Language


P. Huotari

LCE

DOOR MODULE H

AMD DRIVE 2/7 Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

856476E11

A-SIDE Issue

Page

A

1

1

2

3

4

XC1/5

-E05 1/1 D5

A

XH2/3

K486 14

SAFETY CHAIN

2 1

6 K487

K443-1 K443-2

13 14

13 14

13 22

K553

21

3

4

A) 230 VAC ADO/ACL (LCEADO) MODULE B) 24 VDC ADO/ACL (LCEADOe) MODULE

XM5

-E04 1/3 B2

5

A

230VAC

A

B

B A

B

A K486 K443-1

K443-2

21

21

K487

V57 B

22 22

21

22 A1

A2

K487

&

43

44

A


B K487

A

C

33

A

34 33

34

K443-2

NOTE!

A1

3

A2

K443-2

B

&

K443-1

33

B

4

B

34

K4

A

2

A

1

V72

V58 K443-2

A

D

A

43

K486

44 33

34

K443-1 43

44

K487 13

K443-1 A1

NOTE! 3

A2

K486

14 43

4

B

44

K3

A

2

A

1

V69

E

X5 1

A4

2 3 11 12 13

F

14 15 16 18 19 20 22

G

23 24 25

0/5V

A1

NOTE! 3

A2

4

0/5V B

+5V ADO/ACL

ENABLE

ADO/ACL

SPEED

ADO/ACL

ALLOWED

ADO/ACL

PERMIT

ADO/ACL

PRESENT

K2

A

30 OR 30B = 1.DOOR ZONE

2

A

1

V32

NOTE! K2, K3, K4 ONLY WITH 230 VAC

61:U OR 61:N = 2.DOOR ZONE ADO/ACL

PRESENT

0/12V +24V

K553 2

+24V

1

V31

0/24V 0/24V

C

LCEADOe added

13/01

JKa

B

Remove V38-40, Added K2-K4 42/99

TS

Issue

H

K486

Change description

Date

Des. by

Designed by

Checked by

T.SYRMAN Dept. Appr. by

Date

ECC

Approved by

12.06.1998

HRCKVA HECATA

Language

en Product code

LCE

ADO/ACL- CIRCUIT Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

713310E14

Issue

Page

C

1

1

2

XM13B/1 A

3

722:1 LCEOPT

4

5

XM13A/1

XM13/1

XM13B/2

XM13A/2

XM13/2

XM13B/3

XM13A/3

XM13/3

XM13B/4

XM13A/4

XM13/4

XM13B/5

XM13A/5

XM13/5

XM13B/6

XM13A/6

XM13/6

6

375 LCECPU +24V 0/24V TX+ TX-

RS485

TX+ TX-

S1 1 0 F

B

INPUTS: 24-110VUC/4-18mA X5/1

FRD

J10 DIR

J9


X7/2

MRT/ OUT OF SERVICE

X5/8

WSC

X6/2 X7/1

EMERGENCY POWER DRIVE FULL SERVICE

X5/7

OSS +24V_IO

EMERGENCY POWER DRIVE PERMISSION

X5/6

EPD3

X6/1

EMERGENCY POWER DRIVE SIGNAL

X5/5

REAR

C

2 FIRE DETECTION

X5/4

EPD1 EPD2

FRONT

1 FIRE DETECTION

X5/3

FID2 INV

FIREMAN’S DRIVE

X5/2

FID1

WATER SENSOR

X5/9 X5/10

+24V_IO

OUTPUTS: 12-240VUC/0.01-1A

GND_IO

D

K1

X1/1

FIREMAN’S DRIVE RETURN

X1/2

FRD 1

X1/3 K2

X1/4

FIREMAN’S DRIVE SERVICE

X1/5

FRD 2

X1/6 K3

X2/1

DOOR SWITCH MADE

X2/2

DCL

X2/3

E K4

EPD1

X2/4

EMERGENCY POWER DRIVE

A4

X2/5 X2/6 K5

EPD2

X3/1

LIFT RUNNING

X3/2 X3/3

F

K6

EPD3

X3/4

DOOR ZONE LIFT STOPPED

X3/5 X3/6 K7

X4/1 X4/2

OSI

OUT OF SERVICE

X4/3 K8 G

X4/4 X4/5

DAL-GP

DISTURBANCE ALARM

X4/6

LCE OPT BOX

367 Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE HCE ADDITIONAL DEVICES

Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E15

Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

CONTROL ROOM A

230V N

EMERGENCY POWER DRIVE

SHAFT SEP

TO ANOTHER EPS Sequencer 2 N

N

240V

.1 .2 .3 .4 INTERN

3 2 1

.. ..

ADDRESS 1

"SLAVE"

Elev.8 714 715

E

Elev.7

Elev.6

Elev.5

"MASTER"

Elev.4

Elev.2

Elev.3

11

5

12

1

RUNNING RUNNING 14

2

11

3

12

4

RETURNED RETURNED 14

5

11

6

12

X3

Elev.1

714

714

714

714

714

714

714

715

715

715

715

715

715

715

716

716

716

716

716

716

716

716

717

717

717

717

717

717

717

717

K4

K5

K6

LIFTS 1-4 = SEQUENSER 1

LIFTS 5-8 = SEQUENSER 2 LIFTS 9-12 = SEQUENSER 3 LIFTS 13-16 = SEQUENSER 4

A4

6

2 1 0

REMOTE

PRESELECTED ELEVATORS INTERN

ELEV ELEV ELEV ELEV

.1 .2 .3 .4

.. ..

ADDRESS 2

REMOTE

PRESELECTED ELEVATORS INTERN

4

EPD MODE OUT EPD MODE OUT 14

X2

OFF

ELEV ELEV ELEV ELEV

COM.

OFF

D

1 0 F

ON

INTERN


ON

C

240V

PRESELECTED ELEVATORS REMOTE

PRESELECTED ELEVATORS REMOTE

722 LCEOPT LIFT 1

S1

Sequencer 1

COM.

B

NOTE : MAX. 4 SEQUENSER IN SERIES (= 16 LIFTS)

X5 1 2

F

Elev.8

Elev.7

Elev.6

712

712

712

713

713

713

Elev.5

Elev.4

Elev.3

Elev.2

712

712

712

712

712

713

713

713

713

713

3

Elev.1

4 5 6 7 8

711

711

120ohm 1W resistor in last EPS seguenser

G

711

711 RS2

711

RS1

711

711

PAIR TWINNED 2X 0,40mm2

9

711

120ohm 1W RS2

10

-/24V

RS1

TO ANOTHER EPS Designed by

Checked by


H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Date

ECC

Language

A.Jokivalli en Product code

Approved by

17.05.2002

P.Huotari

LCE

ADDITIONAL DEVICES EMERGENCY POWER DRIVE Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

811853E15

EPS Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

SHAFT A

+24V 0/24V TX+ RS485

TXTX+ TX-

X13B/1

722:11 LCEOPT

XM13A/1

X13B/2

XM13A/2

X13B/3

XM13A/3

X13B/4

XM13A/4

X13B/5

XM13A/5

X13B/6

XM13A/6 F=0,65A

B

+24V 0/24V TX+ TX-

RS485

TX+ TX-

X8/1 X8/2 XM30LCERAL

S1


1 J10

OPTION BOX KM50013945G0*

C

X5/1

ALARM

9 A B

2

DIR

J9

FRONT

228:2 21 24

5 6

INV

REAR

XM30

X5/9

X6/2

X5/10

X7/2

5

GND_IO

LCERAL 228:1

6 XH40 1 -/24V

D

+24V

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ALARM RESET 24VDC

2 3 39:1

4 5

39:R

6

E

ALARM RESET ON MAP

OUTPUTS 10-48VUC/0.02-2A

A4

K2

ALARM FILTERING

KM1335085G03

9

X1/4 39:A 1(-) 5(+)

X1/5

4(11)

F

10

EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ACTIVATION OF ALARM FILTERING

2(12) LCERAL/XM14/3 SEE PAGE LCECPU/XM14/3 E15.4/F3

G

NOTE: C-sw needed for EN81-28 Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by


Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E15

Issue

Page

-

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

CAR A

375 LCECPU

B

806 LCECCB

KNXRIF (KRM) OR F2KX99 (KNX) OR LCEALM

F2KMUL 39

XT2/6

XB18/5

XS1/5

XC12/6 XT2/4

XB18/3

XS1/3

X12/3 J2/3

J4/6

XC12/4 XT2/3

XB18/7

XS1/7

X12/7 J2/7

J5/8

XC12/3 XT2/5

XB18/8

XS1/8

X12/8 J2/8

J5/9

X12/5 J2/5

Alarm NC

J4/2

Alarm

97

XC12/5

+12V

0/12V WHEN ACU F

See page - E18 C3

BATT.CHARGER


12V

C

KDL16/KDM

DRIVE MODULE D

750521G01

XM14/1

XBAT1/1

XM14/2

XBAT1/2


A4

+12V

228:LCERAL

XM14/1

XM14/1

+12V

0/12V

XM14/2

XM14/2

0/12V

ALARM

XM14/3

XM14/3

ALARM

HELP COMING

XM14/4

XM14/4

HELP COMING

11

F

See page - E04 C2

to 228:2 LCERAL XM14 see page-E15.5

1335084G**

E

DCBL/DCBG

X1/5 1(-) SEE PAGE E15.3/F4 XH40/10

39:A

S2

ALARM INHIBIT

12 K1

5(+)

XM30/1

CONTROL ROOM

0...15s

S1

14

11

REMOTE ALARM

XM30/3

24

21

Max. 50V/1A

XM30/2

22

21

V12

XM30/4 G

10-30V RESET ALARM

XM30/5

S3

XM30/6

RESET ALARM

Designed by

ALARM PRESSED

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by


LCE REMOTE ALARM Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E15

Issue

Page

-

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

SHAFT A


228:1 LCERAL XM14

375 LCECPU XM14

B

RAL

1 2 3 4

S2 0...15s

Alarm inhibit

Alarm pressed S1

14

V12

K1 11 see page E15.3

Reset alarm

XM30 5 6

S3

21

24

21

22

1 2 3 4

Reset alarm 10-30VDC !

REMOTE ALARM

D

228:2 LCERAL XM14 1 2 3 4

E

S2 0...15s

Alarm inhibit

Alarm pressed S1

A4


C

14

V12

K1 11 Reset alarm

XM30

F

5 6

S3

21

24

21

22

Reset alarm 10-30VDC !

1 2 3 4

G

Designed by

see page E15.3

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

Change description

H

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T HCE LCE REMOTE ALARM Sales ref. no.

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Drawing no.

350045814E15

Issue

en LCE

Page

-

5

1

2

3

4

A

5

6

CAR ROOF

806 LCECCB* LCE/ACU

B

XS2

XS1


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

XB18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

+24V - E07 A3 Emergency light 0/24V TXAlarm TX+ +12V Help is coming Intercom Intercom

C

See page - E08 B3

D

KNXRIF (KNX-M) OR F2KX99 (KNX-99) OR LCEALM XS1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A4

E

F1/3A

X12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

F

G

Designer

Checker


H

Change

Date

Des

Appr

Date

PCM

Language

P. Airaghi Approver

29.01.2008

en Product c.

T.Niinivaara LCE

LIFT ANNOUNCER ACU F Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

885520E18

Issue

Page

-

1

2

2

XM18/2

1

XC12/8

XT2/8

0/12V

XC12/4

XT2/4

+12V

XC12/3

XT2/3

+24V 0/24V

XB34/2

XB34/1

XB34/1

44:2 44:3

CONTROL CIRCUIT

XL1/13

XL1/13

XL1/14

XL1/14

10 Intercom

XB18/2

WHEN

WHEN

XB18/7

ACU F

LCEABB

See page - E18 C3

See page 989624E16

2 Emergency light 7 +12V

XB18/5

5 Alarm

XB18/8

XT1/1 XT1/2 XL1/8

9 Intercom

XB18/10

XT2/5

HELP COMING

XL1/8

8 Help is coming

See Page -E08 1B3

CAR XB32/2

MAP XL9/2 375:1

-

+12VDC

100

1

INTERCOM

4 2

XH11/1

E

230VAC

SHAFT

XT3/6

XC4/2

XT3/5

See page

43

45

XB13/1 XB13/2

CCBe CCBN

44

XB14/2

K2

XB14/1

XM7/3

139

A4

XC4/3

XB35/1

XM7/2

H225/2

L2

225

FRD EU SHAFT LIGHTING SEE PAGE -E26 1/1

L3 H225/5

290:3 *SEE PAGE -E04 1/2

MAP MSW4

(L) (L3)

MSW5

1

290:1 I>30mA

1

2

1

1

G

(N)

290:2

2

1 1

2 H157/1

157

2

1

MSW4 MSW5

2

262:1

SEE PAGE -E04 1/2 (N)

268:1

274

236

262 2

H225/1

L3

L2

F

65

XB15/2

CCBe CCBN

379 LCE230

WHEN LCEABB

XB15/1

K1

3

XB35/2

268 2

*E02 251

A2

137

H157/4 A1

157

158

157

H157/3 H157/2

4

3

4(N)

3(N)

OPTIONAL WHEN NOCAB

H157/5

SHAFT

PE

H

+

989624E16

CCBe CCB

XL9/4

CCB CCBe

CAR LIGHT SUPERVISION WHEN CCBe

XL9/1

D

227

12VDC

XB32/1

XL9/3

XH11/2

KNXRIF (KRM) or F2KX99 (KNX)

XS1

XB18/9

XT2/6

ALARM

XC11/1 XC11/2

C

XB34/2

CEL S XT2/7

XC12/5

6

CEL S

XC12/7

XC12/6


3

XM18/3

S12/0,5A

B

806 LCECCB

100

XM18/1

A

5

CONTROL ROOM

F2/2A

XM18/4

4

BATT. CHARGER

375 LCECPU

3

INTERCOM

1

B A

Re-connected CCB signals to 45 31.7.2013ettessa

Issue

Change description

E.Riikonen / Jomine Dept.

Added CEL S, 225 re connected 16-04-12 kaimma5 Date

Des. by

Checker

Designer

Appr. by

Date

HAT

Language

J.Kantola

en

Approver

2011-09-23

Product c.

J.Helvilä

LCE

CAR/SHAFT LIGHTING AND ALARM Sales ref. no.

Draw. no.

1374526E23

Issue

B

Page

1

1

2

SEP 375 LCECPU A

3

5

880329G06

SINGLE DESK INTERCOM

OPTIONAL

KM880329G10

+

JUNCTION BOX

a b

CR CR

-

XM18/3

6

CONTROL ROOM

XM18/4 XM18/1

S12/0,5A

4

CURRENT

b

HELIX Cable

LIMITER

XM18/2

a

a b

880329G**

B

CAR

0/12V +12V

100:1

CAR ROOF JUNCTION BOX

OPTIONAL

a

A

a CAR ROOF

b

B

b

INTERCOM

a


SHAFT PIT C

w MP MP MP MP

K100 11

JUNCTION BOX

A 14

B

-MP -MP -MP -MP

100:1 INTERCOM

880329G09

INTERCOM

b

D

COP 100:1

a

MAP XL1/13

XL1/13

XL1/14

XL1/14 XL9/2

E

BR

Disconnected

375:1 MAIN FLOOR

XL9/3

A4

100:1

100:1 INTERCOM

INTERCOM

b a

F

880329G07 BR

(CR)=WITH A CONTROL ROOM (MP)= WITH A MAINTENANCE PHONE (-MP)= WITHOUT A MAINTENANCE PHONE

(LS-) 10 (LS+) 9 (mic-) 8 (mic+) 7 (GND) 6 (Ta) 5 (GND) 4 (AL) 3 (a) 2 (b) 1

133

(gn) 3 (gl) 2 (-) 1

Connected

FRD EN/RU SHAFT LIGHTING SEE PAGE -E26 1/1

G

Designer

C

PIT PHONE ADDED

HECKSI 05/15 HOEJKA

B

a & b wiring changed MAP wiring changed

HECKSI 37/12 HOEJKA Dept.

Change description

Des. by

Issue

H

a b AL GND

Date

Appr. by

Checker

M. Manfredi

Language

P. Airaghi

Date

RES

D5

en

Approver

22.09.2006

Product c.

A. Jokivalli

CAR/SHAFT ELICOM II INTERCOM FOR A SINGLE SYSTEM Sales ref. no.

Draw. no.

880331E23

Issue

Page

C

1/2

1

2

3

4 5 1375027G01 Induction loop CON3 amplifier CON1 +12VDC + + (Option) GND 1375029 I/P 1 I/P 2 +- +CON2

CAR CONNECTION BOX A

KNXRIF

X5

770300G01

766 ACU X4

AUDIO AUDIO

770267G01

98

Signal audio

P3 2 1

Beneath Alarm NC

2 1 0

C

Top Alarm NC

GSM = 1 PSTn = 1-n See delivery documents Test Alarm COP Alarm NC Speech contact Intercom-B Intercom-A Alarm registered +12V LON-B Alarm NO See Page LON-A -E08 B2 0/24V Emerg.light +24V

D

J1

1 2

1 2

3 4 5

3 4 5

XC9B

713856G01

770264G01

Antenna 1375028*

J1

1 2

1 2

3 4 5

3 4 5

XC9B

CAR LIGHT DETECTOR (Option)

Alarm button beneath the car 39:3

Alarm button on car roof 39:2

X12 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

F1/3A 801114G**

E

F2KMUL See Page -E08 C3

A4


770230G01

XC9C

3 4 5 6

CAR ROOF

1375559*

1 2

B

1 2

1375346G01

Signal audio 1 2 3 4

6 X1

F

CAR CONTROL PANEL

J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

G

C

Induction loop added

38/10

MNo

B

ACU Reference added on p.2

05/08

JKa

Issue

Change description

Date

Des. by

Designed by

Checked by

A.Zotti Dept. Appr. by

Approved by

Date

RES

Language

P. Airaghi 02.10.2002

Product code

A. Jokivalli

en LCE

Title

ADDITIONAL DEVICES H

KRM Sales ref. no.

Drawing no.

-

812301E24

Issue

Page

C

1/2

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

CAR CONNECTION BOX 770268G01 GSM (Option)

1 2 3

47 48 49 50

47 48 49 50

. . .

+24V Emerg.light 0/24V LON-A Alarm NO LON-B +12V Alarm registered See Page Intercom-A -E08 B2 Intercom-B

SIM Card

C

X20

1 2 3

. . .

B

KNXRIF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

XS2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

XS1

WHEN ACU F

See page - E18 C3

X7

1 2

713815G0x

806 LCECCB* 100 INTERCOM

D

2 1

XB33

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3

XB18

2 1 XT2/10 XT2/9 XT2/8 XT2/7 XT2/4 XT2/3

3 2 1

E

A4


770261G01

CONTROL PANEL

375 LCECPU

XC12/3 XC12/4 XC12/7 XC12/8

XM18/1 XM18/2 XM18/3 XM18/4

F

TELEPHONE Network (Option)

+12V 0/12V

770260G01

XC20/1 XC20/2

1 2

TO NEXT LIFT

OR GSM Gateway (Option)

1 2

230VAC OR

G

12VDC

TELEPHONE Network C B Issue

Induction loop added p.1 ACU Reference added Change description

1 2

38/10

MNo

05/08

JKa

Date

Des. by

XM18

Designed by

Checked by

A.Zotti Dept. Appr. by

Approved by

Date

RES

Language

P. Airaghi 02.10.2002

Product code

A. Jokivalli

en LCE

Title


KRM Sales ref. no.

Drawing no.

-

812301E24

Issue

Page

C

2/2

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

SEP 379 LCE230 LCEADO

CAR

768973G01

806 LCECCB XC3/1

XT3/1

XB9/1

XC3/2

XT3/2

XB9/2

47

B

D

E

MAP 774358G01

SHAFT

A4


C

277 774390G*

F

147

XM9/2 XM9/1

G

Designed by

Checked by

T. Tinti Dept. Issue

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Approved by

Date

29.10.2001

RES

Language

A. Jokivalli

en Product code

P. Huotari

LCE


MAINTENANCE INTERCOM Sales ref. no.

Drawing no.

-

781712E25

Issue

Page

-

1/1

1

A

2

3

SEP/ CONTROL PANEL 375 LCECPU

XT1

XB18

F2KX99 OR KRM XS1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0/24V

2

2

3

3

3

3

TO RS485 0/24V

X5

XM13:A

+24V

1

1

FRD

0/24V

2

2

GND

RS485

3

3

RS485

4

4

RS485

5

5

RS485

6

6

J1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J2

X12

722:1 LCEOPT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND FIREMAN’S SWITCH

SHAFT

71

Firemans switch

1

133

10

X5

FID B

Fire detection at landings 193 At every floor

2

193

10

GND

193

D

X5

FID M

XM13:B


F2KKS2 J6

+24V

XM13

6

32 F2KMUL

B

C

5

CAR 806 LCECCB

XC11

4

18 Smoke detector

3

10

GND

FID G & FID M = FID G ONLY WITH CPU561

E

A4

XM13:A

722:2 LCEOPT

Disable 1. return floor 193:A

7

FIDA1

193:B

8

FIDA2

Disable 2. return floor

10

GND

F

MACHINE ROOM

X5

G

Designed by

Checked by

A.Zotti A Issue

H

FID G added Change description

Dept.

21.2.2011 JKa Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Date

RES

Language

P.Airaghi

en Product code

Approved by

17.05.2002

A.Jokivalli

LCE

ADDITIONAL DEVICES FIREMANS DRIVE Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

812305E26

Issue

Page

A

1

1

A

2

SEP/ CONTROL PANEL 375 LCECPU XC11

3

CAR 806 LCECCB* XT1

4

F2KX99 KNXRIF OR LCEALM

XB18

XS1

5

6

F2KCDLA

32 F2KMUL 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J2

X12

+24V

1

1

1

1

1

1

0/24V

2

2

3

3

3

3

TO RS485 0/24V

J9

J1

J6

J3

(+24) (GND)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND

71:SC

1 2

B


XM13

C

XM13:A

+24V

1

1

0/24V

2

2

RS485

3

3

RS485

4

4

RS485

5

5

RS485

6

6

722:1 LCEOPT

X5

MAP D

872855G0* 14

K268:1 + 11

713214G0*

1

Firemans switch

133

X1

5

X5

FID B 1

71

BusSelect +15V BusDataOut +15V BusDataIn GND BusClock GND

10

GND 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FIREMAN’S SWITCH

FRD

FRD EU MODULE

J2

F2KKS2

J1

J6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FIRE SERVICE BUZZER

1 2

X8

Fire detection at landings 193 At every floor

2

193

10

GND

193

2

SHAFT LIGHTING

SHAFT X5

FID M

10

GND

FID G & FID M = FID G ONLY WITH CPU561

XM13:A

722:2 LCEOPT F

18 Smoke detector

3

A4

XM13:B

SEE PAGE -E23 1/1

E

X5

Disable 1. return floor 193:A

7

FIDA1

193:B

8

FIDA2

Disable 2. return floor

10

GND

DRIVE X3 4

CONTROL PANEL KM766436G0*

G

ONLY WITH V3F18

C Issue

H

C2

3

C3

F2KCDLA connection fixed Change description

+24V 0/24V

34/11 JKa Date

Des. by

Appr. by

Designed by

Checked by

J.Kantola

LCM/P.Laukkanen

en

Dept.

Approved by

Product code

LCM/A.Jokivalli

LCE

Date

LCM

13.01.2006

Language

ADDITIONAL DEVICES FIREMANS DRIVE Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

861951E26

FRD EU Issue

Page

C

1/1

1

2

KGC:1

1343770G01

COM1

2 3 5

2 3 5

NETWORK 1 -E06

1 2

SERIAL NET

S1

5 POWER/J3

6

OUT

IN

+24V 0/24V

1 2

1 2

TX+ 732:1 NETWORK/J1 TXNETWORK ADAPTER

1 2

251:1 POWER

2 3 5

X1A B

TX+ TXGND

EIA-232/J5

COM2 TX+ TXGND

4

EIA-232/J5

2 3 5

TX+ TXGND

A

3

TX+ TXGND

ON/Up OFF/ Down

1 2 345678

S1 ON/Up

POWER/J3 +24V 0/24V

1 2

TX+ 732:2 NETWORK/J1 TXNETWORK ADAPTER

1 2

OFF/ Down

1 2 345678

+24V 0/24V

L N PE

SEE PAGE 864842E01

IN

OUT 1 2

1 2 3

L N PE

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3

SEE PAGE 864842E01

251:2 POWER XG1

X1A

1 2

1 2

-E06

XG5 1 2 3 4

X1B

SERIAL NET

1 2


C

NETWORK 2 -E06

X1B

XG1

1 2

1 2


PC-LAN

D

-E06

E-Link

SUPPLIED LOCALLY

1343770G02 KGC:2

PC-LAN

PC-LAN


OUT

A4

SERIAL NET

1 2

1 2

X1A 120 Ohm./0.5W

1 2 3

IN

OUT 1 2

1 2

SERIAL NET

L N PE

251:1 POWER

1 2

X1B F

IN +24V 0/24V

732:1 NETWORK ADAPTER

X1B 1 2

POWER/J3 +24V 0/24V

EIA-232/J5 2 3 5

120 Ohm./0.5W

TX+ TXGND

251:2 POWER

1 2

NETWORK/J1

XG1

1 2

1 2

TX+ TX-

L N PE

+24V 0/24V

1 2 3

SEE PAGE 864842E01

X1A

SEE PAGE 864842E01

E

COM1 TX+ TXGND

G

2 3 5

XG5

COM2 TX+ TXGND

1 2

1 2 3 4

NETWORK/J1

XG1

1 2

1 2

732:2 NETWORK ADAPTER EIA-232/J5

2 3 5

2 3 5

POWER/J3 +24V 0/24V

TX+ TXGND

TX+ TX-

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE HCE KONE GROUP CONTROL COMPUTER NETWORK 1&2 E-LINK Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E28

Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

350045814

ACU CODE DIMENSION FLOOR MARKING SIDE FLOOR

B


350045815/16

--32 31 --30 --29 --28 --27 --26 --25 --24 --23 --22 --21 --20 --19 --18 --17 --16 --15 --14 --13 --12 A 9 11 A 8 10 A 7 9 A 6 8 A 5 7 A 4 6 A 3 5 A 2 4 A 1 3 DD -* 2 0 A 1 N -1 * MAIN FLOOR ** TRANSFER FLOOR

C

D

A4

E

F

SIDE A = C = AC = E = N = DD = EZ =

G

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 2855 2855 3820

--32 31 --30 --29 --28 --27 --26 --25 --24 --23 --22 --21 --20 --19 --18 --17 --16 --15 --14 --13 --12 A 9 11 A 8 10 A 7 9 A 6 8 A 5 7 A 4 6 A 3 5 A 2 4 A 1 3 DD -* 2 A 0 1 A -1 * MAIN FLOOR ** TRANSFER FLOOR

-----------------------------------------------------------------

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 3900 2855 2855 3820

-----------------------------------------------------------------

codes: A-side served floor C-side served floor Both sides served Emergency exit floor Non-served floor Dummy/virtual floor Express zone

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

H

Change description

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE HCE FLOOR INFORMATION

Sales ref. no.

-

Drawing no.

350045814E60

Issue

Page

-

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

4

150

75 75

300

75 75

300

150

150

300

150

150

B

3

150

150

150

300

150

150

L1 N

C Min. 150

S (White)

77:S when

a) L1>h1 b) L1>h2

(White)

NOTE! when L1SB > L1 => L1SB = L1/2

N

D

2

75 75

150

300

150

300

SERVED FLOOR OR NOT SERVED FLOOR

Min.200

150 150

150

L1 (White)

h1

S N

(White)

S

CAR POSITION = BOTTOM FLOOR E

h1/2 =L1SB

N

61:U B30

30

152

1

77:N

77:S

77:U

68:U

51

150

A4


S

SLS

61:N

F

30 B30 51 61:N 61:U 77:N 77:U 77:S

G C

Speed L1=> m/s mm 0,5 750 1.0

1200

1.6

2700

1.75 3000 2.0

3700

2.5

5500

Clarified texts, "when 77:S is needed". Oscill. dimension 162mm to 152mm 11.03.2010 ettejsa

B

77:S rule changed

48/05

JKa

A

77:S rule added

25/05

JKa

Issue

Note!

Door zone Door zone Final limit switch Levelling switch Levelling switch Normal terminal stopping Normal terminal stopping Synchronization switch

Change description

Date

Des. by

Designed by Dept.

Checked by

J.Kantola Date

LCM

Language

LCM/A.Jokivalli

17.05.2005

Appr. by

Approved by

Product code

LCM/P.Huotari

en LCE

SHAFT LAYOUT H

LOWERMOST FLOOR Sales ref. no.

Drawing no.

-

861393E60

Issue

Page

C

1/3

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

75 75

150

T-1

150

300

150

B-SIDE SERVED FLOOR h/3

B

75 75

150

ELF

h/3

10000< h <15000 C

h/3 D

75 75

150

3

150

300

A-SIDE SERVED FLOOR

150

*)h/2

E

ELF

5000< h <10000

ELF = NOT SERVED FLOOR

75 75

150

A4


75 75

150

ELF

*)h/2

75 75

150

2 F

61:U 61:N

30

Door zone

B30

Door zone

61:N

Levelling switch

61:U

Levelling switch

150

300

150

300

150 30

150

A-SIDE & B-SIDE SERVED FLOOR

B30

Note! EXTRA LONG FLOOR TO FLOOR DISTANCE If floor to floor distance exceeds 5M(=H) dummy floor is needed.

G C

No changes on this page.

B

77:S rule changed

48/05

JKa

A

77:S rule added

25/05

JKa

Issue

Change description

11.03.2010 ettejsa

Date

Des. by

Designed by Dept.

Checked by

J.Kantola Date

LCM

Language

LCM/A.Jokivalli

17.05.2005

Appr. by

Approved by

Product code

LCM/P.Huotari

en LCE

SHAFT LAYOUT H

INTERMEDIATE FLOORS Sales ref. no.

Drawing no.

-

861393E60

Issue

Page

C

2/3

A

2

3

4

5

6

2000

1

CAR POSITION = TOP FLOOR 61:U 30

152

T

B30

77:N

77:U

77:S

150

51

68:U SLS

61:N

h2/2 =L1ST

B

N S (White)

N L1

C

T-1

150

75 75

300

150

300

150

S

h2

(White) Min.200

150

SERVED FLOOR OR NOT SERVED FLOOR

150 N

77:S when

a) L1>h1 b) L1>h2

Min. 150

(White)

(White)

NOTE! when L1ST > L1 => L1ST = L1/2

S N D

T-2

150

75 75

300

75 75

300

150

300

L1

150 150

150

E

A4


S

T-3

150

150

300

150 150

150

Note!

F

30 B30 51 61:N 61:U 77:N 77:U 77:S

G C

Door zone Door zone Final limit switch Levelling switch Levelling switch Normal terminal stopping Normal terminal stopping Synchronization switch

1.0

1200

1.6

2700

1.75 3000 2.0

3700

2.5

5500

Clarified texts, "when 77:S is needed". Oscill. dimension 162mm to 152mm 11.03.2010 ettejsa

B

77:S rule changed

48/05

JKa

A

77:S rule added

25/05

JKa

Issue

Speed L1=> m/s mm 0,5 750

Change description

Date

Des. by

Designed by Dept.

Checked by

J.Kantola Date

LCM

Language

LCM/A.Jokivalli

17.05.2005

Appr. by

Approved by

Product code

LCM/P.Huotari

en LCE

SHAFT LAYOUT H

TOPMOST FLOOR Sales ref. no.

Drawing no.

-

861393E60

Issue

Page

C

3/3

1

2

3

4

5

6

LIGHTING A

BRAKE RELEASE CAM

MAP


B

C

TOP MODULE OPTION

D

SEE DRAWING

E90/3

BOARDS

E

SWITCH MODULE

A4

OPTION

F

BOTTOM MODULE SEE DRAWING

E90/2

OPTION G LIGHTING SHAFT

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

Change description

H

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE HCE LAYOUT FOR MAP Sales ref. no.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing no.

350045814E90

Issue

Page

-

1

2

3

4

39 270 270 R RB

1

A

6

REMOTE ALARM BUTTON

X3

S1

BDT OPTION

S2

268

FRD * EU OPTION

C

236 290 290 2 1

268:1

CONTROL FUSE OPTION

262:1

TEST

FRD UK OPTION

FIREMAN’S FIREMAN’S

A4

1

E

DRIVE DRIVE

D

SEGMENTED SHAFT NETWORK OPTION

220 262 F10


274

B

5

ISM OPTION F

G

SHAFT LIGHT

Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

Change description

H

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE HCE LAYOUT FOR BOTTOM MODULE

Sales ref. no.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing no.

350045814E90

Issue

Page

-

2

1

2

3

4

6

LIGHTING

LCESIB

A

B


5

BRAKE RELEASE CAM

C

SCN M , TCT N OPTION

SCN M , TCT N D

ISE OPTION XL8 S15

XL1

XL9

S14

F1

OSG TEST

E D10

D3

D22 D24

D8 D26 D22

UP CALL

D22

D25

MENU

CAR CALL

SELECT S6 S7

A4

KONE Elevators ACCEPT 375:1 LOPCB DOWN CALL S4

INHIBIT DOOR OPENING INHIBIT LANDING CALLS RS232 MODE

RDF UP

F

S13

S11

XL7

S2

RDF DW

S16

S1

OFFSET R127

GAIN TP1

F2

XL2 XL3 XLH9

XL4

XL5

XL6

XLH2 XLH3

XLH1

F3

F2

F1

KONE Elevators 379:1 LOP230 XLH7

XLH6

XLH4

XLH8

G

XLH5 Designed by

Checked by

Language

RAGESH.E.G

Issue

Change description

H

Date

Des. by

Appr. by

en K.MOHAN Dept. Date Product code Approved by 19.05.2015 NAVANEETHAN.T LCE HCE LAYOUT FOR TOP MODULE

Sales ref. no.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing no.

350045814E90

Issue

Page

-

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

B

723 LCEREC

TOP MODULE 1374514E91

C

375 LCECPU561

D

379

ADO/ADOE

LCE230


SEE DRAWING

A4

379

E

OPTIONS MODULE

F

SEE DRAWING

E90/6

ADDITIONAL DEVICES

G

Designer

Checker


Change

Date

Des

Appr

HCE

Date

Language

K.MOHAN

19.05.2015

en

Approver

NAVANEETHAN.T

Product c.

LCE

LAYOUT FOR SEP H Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

350045814E90

Issue

Page

-

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

A

TRANSFORMER

B

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


KONE Elevators 723 LCEREC

C

D KONE Elevators 375 LCECPU561

A4

E

F

KONE Elevators 379 LCE 230+ADO/ACL

G

Designer

E.Riikonen / Jomine Dept. Issue

Change

Date

Des

Appr

Date

HAT

2011-09-19

Checker

Language

J.Kantola

en

Approver

Product c.

J.Helvilä

LCE

LAYOUT FOR TOP MODULE H Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

1374514E91

Issue

-

Page

1/1

1

2

3

4

5

6

A


B

C

XW XH15

X2

XG5 XG1B XG1A

X7

F1

XS2

XH15

371:1 LCEGTWO X3

D XS1

XS1 X3

371:2 LCEGTWO XH15

KONE Elevators FRD FR

XS2

F1

E X7

X2

A4

XG1A XG1B XG5

F

G

Designer

Checker


Change

Date

Des

Appr

HCE

Date

Language

K.MOHAN

19.05.2015

en

Approver

NAVANEETHAN.T

Product c.

LCE

LAYOUT FOR OPTIONS MODULE H Sales ref. no.

-

Draw. no.

Issue

350045814E90

Page

-

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

SIGMA/DELTA CALLS AND SIGNALS

A

SEE PAGE SIGMA 713872G0*

DELTA NOTE! 661522-24G0* Landing calls and signals

-E03

713220G0* 713229G0* 713834G0* 713835G0* 713221G0* 713838G0* 713837G0* 713819G0*

661508G0* 661511G0* 661505G0* 661504G0* 661507G0* 777648G0* 661512G0* 661506G0*

(&-E09)

713218G0*

661520-21G0* (31:*) Car call buttons or 751222G0*

-E24

713231G0* 713229G0*

661510G0* 661511G0*

-E02


B

C

(100) (39) (34) (34:S) (34:E) (36) (37) (96)

Intercom KNX/Alarm Door open button Door close button Door extension Car lighting Car fan Car position

D

(39:1) Alarm button (39) KNX/Alarm

EURECA/MCD CAR WIRING DIAGRAM SEE PAGE

A4

E

EURECA 713203G0* 713204G0* 713201G0* 713200G0*

MCD 602162G0* 728772G0* 728774G0* 728773G0*

NOTE! (52) Safety gear contact (57) Emergency exit contact (43) Car fan (44) Car light

MONOSPACE

TRANSYS

NOTE!

713859G0*

728783G0*

-E03

F

-E03

(51) Final limit switch

G

C

36 cable added

20/02

JKa

Designed by

B

(51) cable added

35/01

JKa

Dept.

Date

Des. by

Issue

Change description

H

Checked by

P. Laiho Appr. by

Date

ECC

Language

A. Jokivalli 20.03.2000

en Product code

Approved by

A. Tamminen

LCE

MCD/DELTA ELECTRIFICATION SPECIFICATION Sales ref. no.

WIRING DIAGRAM

Drawing no.

771664

Issue

Page

C

1


2.3

Basic Characteristics of Safety Components

SAFETY COMPONENT

EDMS number of the certificate

CERTIFICATE NO.

Overspeed Governor OL35

CT-04.01.001

TÜV-A-AT-1/98/001 CEGB/5

Safety Gear, Progressive SGB 01

CT-07.01.020

TÜV-A-AT-1/99/001 CEFV/1

Landing Door Locking Devices AMDL1-R2-EN

CT-03.01.069

TÜV-A-AT-1/00/016 CETV/2

Car Door Locking Devices AMDC1-R2

CT-03.01.211

TÜV-A-AT-1/99/006 FKTV/4

Oil Buffers OB20

CT-05.01.012

QSCH 001-8

CT-10.01.098

06367/1

CT-10.01.152 CT-10.01.083

06367/2 04276

CT-10.01.044

01197

CT-10.01.078

01197/1

CT-10.01.099

01197/2

CT-10.01.147 CT-11.65.011

11568/1 09535/2

CT-10.01.115

153815

Unintended Car Movement UCM

CT-01.01.115

09522/8

Ascending protection MX 10

CT-04.01.051

00112/5

Safety Circuits (LCE electrification) LCECCB incl. printed circuit board 713713H07 LCECCBe iKM50025437H02 LCE230 713120G01 and G02 incl. printed circuit board 713123H04 LCE230 ADO/ACL (713163H04 or H06) Certificate of conformity LCEADO 713160G01 and G02 rev. 2,6 incl. printed circuit board 713163H06 LCEADO 713160G02 rev. 2,7 including printed circuit board 713167H06 KM50006053 H03 LCEADOe KDM Inverter Drive with one main contactor LCE-KDM40

Note: If an EC Type Examination Certificate is updated, that updated version can also be used provided that the safety component can be used for the same application range.


180 ( 81 )


2.4

Basic Characteristics for Ropes

2.4.1

Suspension Rope

ROPE TYPE (Grade / construction)

PAWO F3 2 1570 N/mm (8x19S+8x7+FC) 1) After running in period.

2.4.2

8

E-modulus 2 kN/mm

1)

75

METALLIC AREA 2 (mm )

WEIGHT (kg/m)

MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD (kN)

27.5

0.24

36.2

METALLIC AREA 2 (mm )

WEIGHT (kg/m)

MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD (kN)

13.8

0.13

21.0

Overspeed Governor Rope

ROPE TYPE (Grade / construction) PAWO F1 6x19S + FC 2 1770 N/mm 1) After running in period.

2.4.3

NOMINAL DIAMETER (mm)

NOMINAL DIAMETER (mm) 6.0

E-modulus 2 kN/mm

1)

45

Compensation Cable

Type QL15


Weight (kg/m) 2.2

Fixing distance L (mm) 610

181 ( 81 )

Chain size (mm) 7.0

Cable external diameter D (mm) 35.0

Owner’s Documentation Maintenance Instructions

3. 3.1

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

General Maintenance Instructions for the Elevator ............................................. 3 3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3 3.1.4 3.1.5 3.1.6 3.1.7 3.1.8 3.1.9

3.1.10 3.1.11 3.1.12 3.1.13

Introduction And General Information ........................................................................... 3 3.1.1.1 Special Signs and Notices ................................................................................. 5 3.1.1.2 Definitions ........................................................................................................ 6 3.1.1.3 KONE MonoSpace® Machine-Room-Less Elevator .............................................. 8 3.1.1.4 Component Layout and Description ................................................................. 9 3.1.1.5 Machine ......................................................................................................... 10 3.1.1.6 Shaft Electrification Panel (SEP) ....................................................................... 10 3.1.1.7 Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) .................................................................... 10 3.1.1.8 Overspeed Governor....................................................................................... 10 3.1.1.9 Landing And Car Doors .................................................................................. 10 3.1.1.10 Elevator Car .................................................................................................... 11 3.1.1.11 Counterweight ............................................................................................... 11 3.1.1.12 Guide Rails ...................................................................................................... 11 3.1.1.13 Buffers ............................................................................................................ 11 3.1.1.14 Elevator Ropes ................................................................................................ 11 3.1.1.15 Signalisation ................................................................................................... 11 3.1.1.16 Safety Gear ..................................................................................................... 11 3.1.1.17 Brakes ............................................................................................................. 11 3.1.1.18 Emergency Battery Drive (EBD A Or EBD M) ................................................... 11 Health & Safety .............................................................................................................. 12 3.1.2.1 General Risk Assessments ................................................................................ 12 3.1.2.2 Elevator Safety Precautions.............................................................................. 13 3.1.2.3 Hazardous Substances .................................................................................... 14 3.1.2.4 Safety Components ........................................................................................ 15 3.1.2.5 Hazards .......................................................................................................... 15 Owner’s Obligations ...................................................................................................... 16 Maintenance Company Responsibilities........................................................................ 18 Before You Contact KONE – Maintenance By The Owner ............................................ 20 Pre-Maintenance Procedures ........................................................................................ 22 During Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 24 After-Maintenance Procedures...................................................................................... 25 Cleaning ......................................................................................................................... 26 3.1.9.1 Cleaning The Walls ......................................................................................... 26 3.1.9.2 Cleaning The Ceiling ...................................................................................... 27 3.1.9.3 Cleaning The Floor ......................................................................................... 27 3.1.9.4 Cleaning The Handrails And Buffer Rails .......................................................... 28 3.1.9.5 Cleaning The Seat ........................................................................................... 28 3.1.9.6 Cleaning The Signalisation .............................................................................. 29 3.1.9.7 Cleaning The Tenant Directory ....................................................................... 30 3.1.9.8 Changing Elevator Lighting............................................................................. 30 Inspections By Competent Persons ............................................................................... 31 Preventative Maintenance ............................................................................................. 32 Planned Periodic Maintenance ...................................................................................... Lubrication ..................................................................................................................... 3.1.13.1 Lubrication of Guide Rails ............................................................................... 3.1.13.2 Lubrication of Suspension Ropes .....................................................................


1 ( 95 )

34 36 36 36


3.1.14 3.1.15

3.1.16 3.1.17

3.2

3.3

Maintenance Of An Elevator Having Stand-by Mode Enabled ..................................... 37 Environment .................................................................................................................. 38 3.1.15.1 KONE's Environmental Policy .......................................................................... 38 3.1.15.2 Building Efficiency........................................................................................... 38 3.1.15.3 Energy Savings ............................................................................................... 38 3.1.15.4 Long Lasting Product ...................................................................................... 38 3.1.15.5 Materials Used In The Elevator ........................................................................ 39 3.1.15.6 Packaging Materials ........................................................................................ 39 3.1.15.7 Final disposal of an elevator ............................................................................ 39 Additional Maintenance For Vandal Resistant Elevators .............................................. 40 Spare Parts ..................................................................................................................... 41

Maintenance Instructions For Safety Components ............................................ 42 3.2.1

Landing Door Locks ....................................................................................................... 42

3.2.2 3.2.3

3.2.4 3.2.5

Car Door Locks ............................................................................................................... Safety Gear .................................................................................................................... 3.2.3.1 AQ32 Safety Gear ........................................................................................... 3.2.3.2 CSGB-01 Safety Gear ...................................................................................... 3.2.3.3 USG-25P or SGB 08 Safety Gear ...................................................................... 3.2.3.4 SGB 01, 02, 03 and 05 Safety Gears................................................................ MX 10 Machine Brake.................................................................................................... OL35 Overspeed Governor ............................................................................................

3.2.6 3.2.7 3.2.8 3.2.9

Polyurethane Buffers ..................................................................................................... 66 Oil Buffers ...................................................................................................................... 67 Maintenance Instructions For Ropes ............................................................................. 68 UCM With Doors Open Prevention According To EN 81-1 A3 ..................................... 68

44 45 45 48 51 52 54 62

Periodical Inspections .......................................................................................... 69 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5

3.3.6

3.3.7

3.3.8

3.3.9

Safety ............................................................................................................................. 70 Tools ............................................................................................................................... 70 Performing One-Sided Electrical Braking Test And UCM Test 1 of 2 (With 0% Load) 71 Performing UCM Test 2 of 2 (With 0% Load)............................................................... 73 Final Limit Switch Tests ................................................................................................. 75 3.3.5.1 Testing The Upper Limit Switch ...................................................................... 75 3.3.5.2 Testing The Lower Limit Switch ...................................................................... 76 Traction Tests................................................................................................................. 78 3.3.6.1 Testing Traction (1 of 2) ................................................................................. 78 3.3.6.2 Testing Traction (2 of 2) ................................................................................. 79 Buffer Tests .................................................................................................................... 81 3.3.7.1 Testing The Car Buffers ................................................................................... 81 3.3.7.2 Testing The Counterweight Buffer................................................................... 83 Overspeed Governor Tests ............................................................................................ 85 3.3.8.1 Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Car) ............................................. 85 3.3.8.2 Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Counterweight) ........................... 88 Safety Gear Tests ........................................................................................................... 90 3.3.9.1 Testing The Car Safety Gear ............................................................................ 90 3.3.9.2 Testing The Counterweight Safety Gear .......................................................... 93


2 ( 95 )


3.1

General Maintenance Instructions for the Elevator

3.1.1

Introduction And General Information

Maintenance is defined as all the necessary operations to ensure the safe and intended functioning of the installation and its components after the completion of the installation and throughout its life cycle. Additional information is contained in BS EN 13015 Maintenance for lifts and escalators – Rules for maintenance instructions. The work undertaken can either be remedial or preventative. Remedial work is the rectification or repair work after faults or failure have occurred and may be costly. The aim of preventative work is to minimise faults or failures and so reduce costs. Clearly the main effort must be directed to preventing failures and to maintaining first rate performance of the equipment. This involves careful, regular and methodical observation and action. By following the instructions in this manual you will ensure safe, comfortable and reliable elevator service for the users and also increase the longevity of your elevator and thus better retain your investment's value. Elevators, like all transportation equipment, require maintenance to operate reliably. An operational elevator is an important safety element of your building. It avoids the risks involved in the use of stairs and is essential for the transport of elderly and disabled persons. Preventative maintenance in accordance with this manual will help you ensure a safe and continuously working elevator for the occupants of your building. With proper maintenance you will: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Ensure better safety for elevator users. Better retain the value of your investment. Increase the service life of your elevator. Ensure a more comfortable ride for elevator users. Reduce the number of elevator stoppages due to breakdown. Notice

SAFETY NOTICE If you detect any abnormal behaviour in any of the components of your elevator, contact your maintenance company immediately.

Notice

SAFETY NOTICE It must be ensured that a competent maintenance company, as defined in Section 3.1.1, performs the maintenance activities. The responsibilities in Section 3.1.3 and 3.1.4 should be noted.

KONE as the elevator manufacturer has the best understanding of the maintenance requirements of KONE elevators. KONE is committed to optimising the equipment’s performance by :• using skilled people backed by the latest technology • constantly developing new maintenance methods and techniques • offering tailored and optimised maintenance programs • training committed professionals to focus on the customer and his needs • delivering maintenance services that focus on maximising equipment reliability, availability and safety • taking into consideration particular, specific technical requirements of the equipment • paying attention to specific needs of the building use • providing 24/7 service


3 ( 95 )


3.1.1

Foreword

Continued

KONE service can provide you with the best service and value. As the designer and manufacturer of your elevator, we know the elevator's operating specifications and ensure optimal performance by maintaining the elevator in compliance with those specifications. With the help of the original wiring diagrams, installation manuals and technical drawings, we are the best experts on what, when and how to maintain and repair in your elevator. KONE service personnel are specifically trained to maintain your elevator with the help of our global technical support and the modern tools available to our maintenance teams at all times. KONE spare parts are available quickly through our global parts network and the parts for upgrades are designed specifically for your KONE elevator. KONE also offers global technical support to help you with any questions you have concerning your elevator. With the help of the remote monitoring system you can establish a 24-hour connection between the elevator and KONE service. KONE service can constantly monitor your elevator and instantly detect any abnormal behaviour using the remote monitoring system. KONE service offers you 24-hour top quality call out service that ensures the correct functioning of your elevator. For more information, contact your local KONE service office. Contact information is provided in Section 0 of this document. The purpose of this manual is to assist as a guide in this work. It also draws attention to points concerning safety, both for those working on the equipment and for those using it as passengers. Safety and reliability are KONE's primary concerns and have been strongly emphasised in the design, manufacture, installation and maintenance processes of this Elevator. This manual is intended as a guide for the elevator owner / building occupier but contains procedures that should only be used by competent persons. Only suitably trained persons should attempt to carry out the maintenance and rescue operations detailed herein. Notice

This manual should be stored so that it is accessible to authorised persons if needed, such as in the control cabinet of the elevator.

Danger

MANUAL RELEASE MUST ONLY BE CARRIED OUT BY TRAINED AND COMPETENT PERSONS.


4 ( 95 )


3.1.1.1

Special Signs and Notices

To make the manual easier to use, special symbols and notices are used to point out procedures which require special attention. The following table describes the meaning of the symbols and their relative urgency Symbol

Notice

Likelihood of occurrence

Degree of potential injury or damage

Danger

Will occur if the notice is ignored.

Severe

Warning

Can occur if the notice is ignored.

Severe

Risk of electric shock


Severe

Risk of falling


Severe

Risk of stumbling


Minor

Notice

Will or can occur if the notice is ignored.

Minor

Note

No occurrence. Used for special instructions which are important but not related to hazards.

None

The following table describes the symbols used yn this manual to represent various operation instructions. Symbol

Description Loosen the screw. DO NOT remove it.

Tighten the screw fully.

Wear Safety Gloves.


5 ( 95 )


3.1.1.2

Definitions

Maintenance operations

All the necessary operations to ensure the safe and intended functioning of the installation and its components after : the completion of the installation and throughout its life cycle. Maintenance includes :a) lubrication, cleaning, etc.; However, the following cleaning operations can be not considered as maintenance : 1) cleaning of the external parts of the well; 2) cleaning of the inside of the car. b) checks; c) passenger rescue operations; d) the operations of setting and adjustment; e) repair or changing of components which may occur due to wear or tear and do not affect the characteristics of the installation. The following are not considered as maintenance operations :a) changing of a major component such as the machine, the car, the control panel, etc., or safety component such as safety gear, etc., even if the characteristics of the new component are the same as the original; b) replacement of the installation; c) modernisation of the installation, including the changing of any characteristic of the installation (such as speed, load, etc.); d) rescue operations carried out by Fire Brigades.

Maintenance Company

A company or part of a company where competent maintenance persons carry out maintenance operations on behalf of the owner of the installation. (Refer to BS EN 13015) The maintenance company must ensure that: Risk assessments are carried out for every maintenance operation (including cleaning) on the installation and for every task to be undertaken, taking into account the installer's maintenance instructions. Maintenance work is carried out in conformity with the relevant regulations, instructions and in line with the safety policy of the maintenance company. The maintenance operations are carried out by maintenance persons who are "competent" according to the nature of the intervention, provided with the instructions and the necessary tools and equipment in accordance with the regulations regarding Health & Safety at Work. Any call back is taken care of as soon as possible; most maintenance companies provide a 24 hour call out service. The call out response time, from the call to the arrival on site, must be in accordance with the nature of the call, giving priority to the rescue of persons. A remote monitoring system can provide information for response to the rescue. The competence of the maintenance personnel is continuously updated. The maintenance company should carry adequate and proper insurance cover provided by a recognised insurance company.


6 ( 95 )


3.1.1.2

Definitions

Competent Maintenance Person

Continued

Is a competent maintenance engineer as defined in BS EN 13015. Has been trained in the maintenance procedures of this elevator to enable a true assessment of its condition for continued safe operation. Is supported within his or her company

Owner of the elevator

The natural or legal person who has the power of disposal of the elevator and takes the responsibility for its operation and use.

Handover of elevator

The point in time at which the installer makes the elevator available to the owner for the first time.

Emergency

An abnormal situation in which persons require outside assistance.

Fault

A situation in which safe operation of the elevator, for its intended use, is restricted or impossible.

Manufacturer

The natural or legal person who takes responsibility for the design, manufacture, placing on the market, either of safety components for elevators or of machinery (service elevators and accessible goods only elevators).

Installer

The natural or legal person who takes responsibility for the design, manufacture, placing on the market, installation and handover of the elevator, including its safety components.

Installation

The completely installed passenger elevator or goods/passenger elevator or accessible goods only elevator.

Rescue Operation

The operation starting after receiving notification of a person(s) trapped in a lift and finishing by releasing the trapped person(s).

Notified Body

An independent body with Quality Assurance, elevator experience, professional integrity and technical competence, appointed by an EU Member State.

Repair

Replacement or repair of defective and/or worn components

Safety components

Components which are defined as safety components in the EU Lifts Directive (95/l6/ECAnnex IV).


7 ( 95 )


3.1.1.3

KONE MonoSpace® Machine-Room-Less Elevator

KONE's MonoSpace® elevator is a 2:1 roped traction elevator with a side counterweight. It maximises both vertical and horizontal space efficiency. KONE MonoSpace® eliminates the need for a separate machine room. In traditional elevator systems the machinery of the elevator has been mounted in a machine room. This has taken up valuable rental space and sometimes dominated building design. Since the machine is located in the elevator shaft, these problems no longer exist. KONE MonoSpace® is designed for new or existing buildings. Passengers control the movement of the elevator car with the push buttons located in the elevator car and at the landings. The push buttons are connected to the elevator control panel which is the “intelligence” of the elevator. When the control system registers a call given by a passenger, the car moves in the required direction along guide rails. The car is connected to a counterweight with the ropes passing over the traction sheave/machine. The risk of ropes breaking is negligible provided their condition is monitored according to the maintenance instructions. When the drive system rotates the motor and traction sheave, the car and counterweight move correspondingly. KONE MonoSpace® elevators are designed and equipped to fully comply with all relevant EU directives and are built and installed in accordance with ISO 9000 quality assurance requirements.


8 ( 95 )


3.1.1.4

Component Layout and Description

A diagram of the KONE MonoSpace® elevator's main components is shown below (Suspension ropes are not shown). Descriptions of the nature and functionality of the components follow this diagram.

1

Machine

10 Counterweight guide rails

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Shaft electrification panel (SEP) (Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) Overspeed governor Landing doors Elevator car Car door Counterweight Car guide rails

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18


Car buffer Counterweight buffer Rope suspension points Overspeed governor rope Signalisation Safety gear Brakes Emergency Battery Drive (EBD)

9 ( 95 )


3.1.1.5

Machine

The machine is a gearless synchronous mechanism driven by a variable frequency drive.

3.1.1.6

Shaft Electrification Panel (SEP)

The shaft electrification panel is a part of the elevator control system, placed in the elevator shaft.

3.1.1.7

Maintenance Access Panel (MAP)

The MAP is typically located on the topmost or second topmost floor beside the landing door and contains the elevator emergency drive buttons and the car light supply switch. Due to its placement, it is extremely important that the MAP door is closed and locked at all times. There should not be any flammable materials near MAP.

3.1.1.8

Note

Do not block the working space in front of the MAP. The MAP is needed in rescue and maintenance operations.

Warning

Never leave the MAP door unlocked or open while it is unattended. This provides unauthorised persons access to the elevator controls and may cause danger.

Warning

Never remove the shields from the electrical system while the system is energised.

Warning

The elevator's electrical systems are behind the shield and there is a risk of an electric shock if the shield is removed.

Overspeed Governor

The overspeed governor's function is to stop the elevator, using the safety gear and assisted by the machine brakes. The overspeed governor operates if the elevator car exceeds its rated speed, locking the governor rope which is attached to the safety gear. The safety gear then stops the elevator car. The governor is a mechanical device so remains functional even in the event of a power failure.

3.1.1.9

Landing And Car Doors

Doors are fixed to each landing and on the elevator car to protect users from injury during operation of the elevator. Electrical contacts in the door prevent the elevator from moving if the doors are not fully closed. Landing doors are fitted with a special lock that keeps the doors closed and locked if the elevator car is not level at that landing floor. Preventing the landing door opening by accident is necessary to prevent people from falling into the elevator shaft. Protective devices, for example, photocells, are installed on the car entrance to prevent the doors from closing if someone is entering or exiting the elevator, or standing too close to the doors. In addition to protective devices, all automatic doors have a closing force limiter, which prevents people being crushed between the door panels. If the construction of the door panels is to be changed, check with KONE that the changes are allowed and do not harm the functioning of doors.


10 ( 95 )


3.1.1.10 Elevator Car The purpose of the elevator car is to provide an enclosure for passengers so that they may be carried safely from floor to floor. The elevator car is surrounded by a car frame, which strengthens the elevator car.

3.1.1.11 Counterweight The counterweight ensures traction between the shaft top diverting pulleys and the suspension ropes, and comprise a set of weights to balance the weight of the car and a proportion of the car load.

3.1.1.12 Guide Rails The guide rails are steel rails which guide the elevator car and counterweight through the elevator shaft. Guide rails are attached vertically to the shaft structure.

3.1.1.13

Buffers

The buffers stop the elevator car or counterweight if they descend beyond their normal limit of travel. The “over travel” is improbable because there are many electric safety devices, which initiate braking in any abnormal situation, preventing the car going beyond the lowest or topmost floor level. Because of the buffers, the car or counterweight do not hit the pit floor under any circumstances.

3.1.1.14 Elevator Ropes Elevator ropes are used to connect the elevator car to the machine traction sheave pulleys and counterweight. Each rope is capable of supporting the elevator with a safety factor according to the elevator standards.

3.1.1.15 Signalisation The KONE Signalisation System (KSS) is the elevator's user interface. With operating panels and displays it informs the passengers of the elevator's position, allows them to call the elevator and set the destination floor. The KONE Signalisation System transfers these messages to the elevator network. The elevator network feeds control information to the control unit, which drives the elevator according to user commands. If KONE Remote Monitoring Services™ is used, the signalisation system also operates as a voice connection between the elevator and the service company, allowing trapped passengers to talk to the service company.

3.1.1.16 Safety Gear The safety gear is a mechanical safety device attached to the elevator car frame. If the elevator car exceeds its rated speed and the governor locks the governor rope, the safety gear firmly grips the guide rails and stops the elevator car.

3.1.1.17 Brakes The brakes are electromechanical devices that prevent the elevator car from moving when the car is at rest or power is cut to the machine motor. Two independently-operating brakes keep the position of the traction sheave. The brakes close automatically when the control unit interrupts the electrical power, or if there is a power failure.

3.1.1.18 Emergency Battery Drive (EBD A Or EBD M) The elevator can be equipped with an optional emergency battery drive (EBD), which drives the car to the next landing in case of elevator power brake between landings. Normal operation is restored automatically when the power supply returns. Further information is in Section 4. © 2015 KONE plc All rights reserved

11 ( 95 )


3.1.2

Health & Safety

Safety is KONE's primary concern. Constant attention is directed to safety aspects in the design, manufacture, installed and maintenance of elevators. In addition, KONE maintains a constant research effort in the field of new safety elements in order to provide our customers with the safest products possible. Safety features, for example, the overspeed governor, multiple ropes, locks, dynamic braking, pit safety devices and safety gear make your elevator safe. There are, however, some remaining safety risks that cannot be fully eliminated. The following sections describe how to further increase the safety of your elevator. Also refer to the Owner’s Obligations listed in Section 3.1.3.

3.1.2.1

General Risk Assessments

Risk Assessments are required by a variety of legislation including The Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1999, Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations 2002 and BS EN 13015 Maintenance for lifts and escalators – Rules for maintenance instructions. • • • • • • • •

The maintenance company shall prepare and issue appropriate risk assessments for its activities. Risk assessments are to be validated on site and where necessary amended to suit local conditions and practices. Where risks are rated as significant, managers shall inform the employees or sub-contractors exposed to the risk. The suitability of the risk assessments shall be reviewed annually or when information is made available to indicate that they are no longer valid. Risk Assessments shall be carried out as new equipment or working practices are implemented. The Personal Protective Equipment at Work Regulations 1992 require the maintenance company to perform suitable and sufficient assessments to identify where personal protective equipment should be used. All significant manual handling tasks shall be assessed in accordance with Regulation 4 of the Manual Handling Operations Regulations 1992. The Owner of the installation shall ensure that the risk assessments for maintenance are updated :1. If the maintenance organisation is replaced; 2. If the use of the building and/or the installation changes; 3. After a major modification of the installation or of the building; 4. After an accident involving the installation.


12 ( 95 )


3.1.2.2

Elevator Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions Develop and follow procedures that have assimilated the requirements of national elevator codes and other safety related regulations. Local safety codes and rules must be followed if they exceed KONE standards. Otherwise use the safe working methods defined herein. Follow the safe working methods defined herein. If you are uncertain of the method's safety, seek expert advice. Follow these instructions. Do not skip any steps within the sub-procedures. Skipping steps creates potentially dangerous situations which you have not considered. ENSURE THAT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONDUCTORS ARE SAFELY DE-ENERGISED BEFORE WORKING ON THEM. A locking off system for the main electric supply isolator or, for example, fuse removal or locking and tagging system when applicable, must be agreed with the person responsible for the building’s electrical systems. Personal safety equipment must be available and used as required If there is a risk of injury from a fall, adequate fall prevention system must be in place. Handle and dispose of waste materials in accordance with company procedures that have assimilated the local regulations Use barriers to segregate your work area so that your work does not cause a hazard to others. Keep access ways and fire exits clear. The keys to the maintenance access panel and landing doors must be kept in a secure place inaccessible to unauthorised persons. The keys can be given only to competent maintenance persons.


Note In case of conflict between the code and these instructions, carry out a full risk assessment and define an appropriate course of action with the local regulator and company management. Refer to your local procedures to take the elevator out of use.

Warning signs highlight possible hazards. Be sure that you have the latest maintenance instructions in use. If you are unsure, contact KONE. Do not connect or disconnect any connectors when the power is on

For more information, see the definitions above.

13 ( 95 )


3.1.2.3

Hazardous Substances

The maintenance company shall ensure that all hazardous substances which are used by employees, or substances to which they are likely to be exposed, are assessed in accordance with the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations 2002 (COSHH). The relevant manufacturer’s Product Safety Data Sheets shall be available/obtained and a risk assessment should be made by the maintenance company. If new or revised information is provided by the substance provider then a review of the assessment must be made. The maintenance company shall ensure that: • The senior person present is responsible for validating generic COSHH assessments and ensuring that hazardous substances are used, stored and disposed of in accordance with the assessments. • Hazardous substances not assessed must not be used. • All personnel who use hazardous substances are informed of the hazards and trained to use them safely. • Copies of the relevant Safety Data Sheets and Risk Assessments are kept in each location where hazardous substances are stored or used. • First Aiders or appointed persons for first aid have access to the relevant Product Safety Data Sheets and COSHH assessments.


14 ( 95 )


3.1.2.4

Safety Components

The elevator is provided with safety equipment as required by :• The Lift Directive 95/16/EC (Annex IV). • Statutory Instrument 1997 No. 831 The Lifts Regulations 1997, SCHEDULE 4, Regulation 2(1). You must maintain the safety components as described in Section 3.2. The maintenance company is responsible for maintenance operations, which includes maintenance on the following items: • Machine brakes • Overspeed governor • Safety gear • Doors • Elevator car and landing door lock • Buffers • UCM monitoring

3.1.2.5

Hazards

Live Electrical Equipment. Danger

This hazard is reduced by restricting access to the places where live electrical equipment exists to those personnel suitably trained and qualified.

Rotating Machinery Danger

This hazard is reduced by restricting access to the places where rotating machinery is located to those personnel suitably trained and qualified.

Danger

Fires in elevator installations are very rare events and in a modern building they are usually localised before serious damage is caused to life or property. It is part of the elevator engineer’s task to look out for sources of fire hazard and take appropriate action.

Warning

It is essential that access to the Maintenance Access Panel and elevator entrances is kept clear at all times to prevent tripping hazards. They should be locked to prevent access by unauthorised persons.

Fire

Access

Control Of Substances Hazardous to Health Warning

Safety data sheets for substances used in the servicing or maintenance of the installation are available from KONE plc where applicable.

C.D.M. Notice


This manual provides the information required for the Health & Safety File under CDM regulations.

15 ( 95 )


3.1.3

Owner’s Obligations

Keep the elevator in safe operating condition. To fulfil this, the owner must use a maintenance company complying with the requirements of standard BS EN 13015 Clause 4.3.2.1. Prior to putting your elevator into service, you must ensure the following: 1. A planned maintenance service program, to be carried out by a maintenance company, is established. The maintenance company should be the same for all elevators on the same site 2. A 24-hour call out service for the elevator is available for the entire time that the elevator is in operation 3. The name and telephone number of the maintenance company is visible inside the elevator

Warning

If the two-way communication system is out of order, the elevator MUST be taken out of service and the maintenance company informed. The elevator must not be used until communication with the breakdown or rescue service is re-established.

Warning

The communication system must be tested every 3 days (as a minimum) according to BS EN 81-28. If the communication system is not connected to a service centre, the building owner / occupier must ensure that the system is manually tested.

As the owner of the building you must make sure that your building is safe for persons that need to use it, by observing the following considerations: 1. If the availability of rescue personnel is changed so that a trapped person cannot be freed without undue delay, the elevator must be taken out of service 2. If maintenance work is to be carried out in the elevator shaft, a competent maintenance person must be available while service personnel are on site 3. The access ways to the elevator and working places must be kept safe and clean. The maintenance company must be informed of any changes or hazards in these access ways 4. The keys to the MAP and landing doors must be kept in a secure place inaccessible to unauthorised persons. The keys may be given only to competent maintenance persons The owner of the installation shall inform the maintenance company: 1. 2. 3. 4.

The access ways to be used and fire evacuating procedures from the building. The location of any keys required for full access to all parts of the elevator. If necessary, the identities of persons who shall accompany the maintenance person(s) to the elevator. If necessary, the specific personal protective equipment to be used in the access ways and, possibly, where the equipment can be found. 5. The necessity of any modification work of equipment, or modification to the conditions related to the elevator 6. About any perceived abnormal functioning of the installation or its direct environment (in case of a dangerous situation he shall put the installation out of service immediately); 7. Before any modification work of any equipment or any condition related to the original installation. In the case of modification of parts of the installation which existed at the time of the original installation, the installers carrying out the modification shall provide updated maintenance instructions, when necessary. The owner should ensure that these updated maintenance instructions are given to the maintenance company and that these updated maintenance instructions are used to update the original maintenance instructions;


16 ( 95 )


3.1.3

Owner’s Obligations

Continued

8. Of any rescue intervention by his authorised and instructed person(s); 9. Before any authorised third party inspection, or works other that maintenance works, are carried out on the installation; 10. Before taking the installation out of service for a prolonged period of time; 11. Before putting the installation back into service after a prolonged period of non operating time. Building owners, or those who have responsibility for managing buildings, are required to ensure that their premises are safe and free from risk to health as far as is practicable. This includes access to the premises and installation equipment and articles or substances used, according to the Use of Work Equipment at the Workplaces regulations. If you are a lift owner or someone responsible for the safe operation of a lift you are a ‘dutyholder’ under The Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations 1998 and have a legal responsibility to ensure that the lift is thoroughly examined and that it is safe to use. For more information refer to Section 3.1.12.

Notice

MAINTENANCE NOTICE A risk assessment of any maintenance area and any maintenance operation to be undertaken shall be carried out by the maintenance company, taking into account the instructions provided in this manual.

The owner of the installation shall take into account the risk assessment made by the maintenance company and ensure that any action required by the risk assessment is carried out. The owner shall ensure that persons using the premises are informed about any remaining risks. The owner of the installation shall ensure that a risk assessment for maintenance is carried out if the maintenance company is changed. Additional reasons for performing a risk assessment are detailed in Section 1.3 The name and the telephone number of the maintenance company shall be placed on the installation, visible by the users. Keys of control cabinets, access panels and of doors shall be available in the building and shall be given only to persons authorised to gain access. The owner of the installation must provide access to the building, to the maintenance company, for the purpose of rescue of persons in all circumstances. The owner of the installation shall assure the attendance of the competent person from the maintenance company, when for building maintenance work is carried out in the well, by his contractors. Access to working places and working rooms must remain safe for the maintenance personnel. The owner of the installation will inform the maintenance company about any hazard or change in the workplace and in these access ways. If you detect any abnormal behaviour in the operation of your elevator, or in any of its components, contact your maintenance company immediately. Notice

In any potentially dangerous situation, take the elevator out of service and inform your maintenance company. The elevator can be switched off (after ensuring no passengers are in the elevator) using the main switch in the Maintenance Access Panel.


17 ( 95 )


3.1.4

Maintenance Company Responsibilities

The maintenance company is responsible for the following: • To carry out the work of maintenance in conformity with the maintenance instructions and based on systematic maintenance checks. • The maintenance company is responsible for carrying out a risk assessment for any maintenance location and for any maintenance operation to be undertaken. • The maintenance company is responsible for carrying out a maintenance programme such that preventive maintenance is suited to the specific installation and that corrective maintenance time, including logistics and technical delays, is as short as reasonably practicable. • To promptly inform the owner of the installation about progressive upgrading that may be required in accordance with any relevant new "Essential Health and Safety Requirements" as defined in new European directives and standards. • The maintenance company is responsible for keeping the a record of the result of each intervention due to a failure of the installation (in particular the type of any failure) which shall be available on request to the owner of the installation. This is in addition to any legal requirements for the owner of the installation to retain records. • In the case of a dangerous situation, the installation shall be taken out of service by the maintenance company and the owner shall be informed. • The maintenance company is responsible for providing a competent person to operate the elevator for inspection by an authorised body and for special works. • In the case of modification of parts of the installation which existed at the time of the original installation, the installers carrying out the modification shall provide updated maintenance instructions, when necessary. These updated maintenance instructions should be used to update the original maintenance instructions. Note

If the installation and/;or its environment are modified, then it is the responsibility of the person creating the change to submit the change to the installer for approval.

• The maintenance company is responsible for deciding the frequency of preventive maintenance operations so that several operations can be performed at the same time to facilitate maximum utilisation of the elevator. • The frequency of maintenance operations should be determined taking into account the operating time, non-operating time, number of trips per year, age and condition, internal and external environmental conditions, weather conditions, location and the needs of the users, of the installation. • The maintenance company is responsible for recording all maintenance operations in the maintenance logbook (Section 1.4). • The maintenance company must use competent maintenance persons, provided with the necessary tools and equipment. The maintenance company must ensure the competency of the maintenance persons is maintained. • The maintenance company is responsible for providing the necessary spare parts for any repair.


18 ( 95 )


3.1.4

Maintenance Company Responsibilities

Continued

• The maintenance company must provide a 24 hour call-out service for the rescue of persons. The maintenance company shall organise rescue as soon as possible (if necessary with a sub-contractor) and to make provision for circumstances such as fire, panic etc. • The maintenance company should update the original maintenance instructions if the installation changes it’s intended use and/or the environmental conditions existing on completion of the original installation • Working on the elevator should be in accordance with BS 7255 Code of practice for safe working on lifts. Note


The maintenance company must carry out a risk assessment of any maintenance area and of any maintenance operation to be undertaken.

19 ( 95 )


3.1.5

Before You Contact KONE – Maintenance By The Owner

Although most of the maintenance done on your elevator MUST be left to your maintenance company, there are a few tasks that can be carried out by your own personnel. These tasks include cleaning the elevator car and all visible elements on the landings, changing lamps and carrying out some inspections. Vacuum cleaning the threshold profiles on car and landing entrances will prevent the doors sticking due to dirt in the guide shoe slots. By carrying out these tasks you will better retain your elevator's value and ensure a more comfortable and safer ride for the users. If you detect any abnormal behaviour in the operation of your elevator, or in any of its components, contact your maintenance company immediately. Notice

In any potentially dangerous situation, take the elevator out of service and inform your maintenance company. The elevator can be switched off (after ensuring no passengers are in the elevator) using the main switch in the Maintenance Access Panel.

Consult your local KONE representative concerning what is and what is not covered under the maintenance agreement. It is important that you understand what maintenance operations you must perform between service calls. Check the following items before contacting KONE. This prevents unnecessary service calls and can place the elevator back in service without additional procedures: • Check that your building has power from the external power grid • Check for broken light bulbs or LEDs inside the elevator car, and replace accordingly if possible • Check that the elevator is not in Fire Service mode • Check that all key operated switches are in normal operating or RUN position • Check for blown fuses or tripped circuit breakers of the building power supply • Check that elevator car is cleaned regularly • Check that there is no debris in landing door sills and elevator car door sills, both are recommended to be cleaned regularly, as debris can prevent the doors from operating properly When you contact KONE for maintenance, provide the following information: • Building address • Elevator number • Description of the problem, be as accurate and detailed as possible Certain interfaces between the elevator and the building are crucial to the safe and correct functioning of the ® MonoSpace elevator. These interfaces include ventilation, electricity supplies and telephone lines. If any of these interfaces appear to be functioning incorrectly or not at all, they must be repaired immediately. If they cannot be repaired without undue delay, the elevator must be taken out of service or the safety of passengers cannot be guaranteed. The purpose of the ventilation system is to keep the temperature and humidity within the originally specified values both in the elevator well and the elevator car. If the ventilation does not operate, the temperature and humidity may exceed the allowed maximum values, which can harm the elevator and make the elevator ride an unpleasant experience. Therefore the humidity and temperature must be kept at the levels specified in original delivery documents.


20 ( 95 )


3.1.5

Before You Contact KONE – Maintenance By The Owner

Continued

Telephone lines will have been connected to your MonoSpace® elevator to enable a 24-hour connection between the elevator and the service office or for example building caretaker. To ensure the safety of your elevator users, you should make sure that this line is functional at all times, including for at least 1 hour during a power failure in the building.

Warning

If the two-way communication system is out of order, the elevator MUST be taken out of service and the maintenance company informed. The elevator must not be used until communication with the breakdown or rescue service is re-established.

The elevator requires electricity to function. The voltage must be kept within tolerances specified in the original delivery documents. To keep the elevator functional it is imperative that you ensure a constant supply of electricity and that the supplied voltage complies with the original delivery documents.


21 ( 95 )


3.1.6

Pre-Maintenance Procedures

The following preparatory steps must be followed: 1.

You should develop and follow procedures that have assimilated the requirements of national elevator codes and other safety related regulations. The local safety codes and rules must be followed if they exceed KONE standards. In case of conflict between the Code and these instructions, a full risk assessment should be carried out and an appropriate course of action defined with the local regulator and company management. Otherwise use the safe working methods defined herein. If you are uncertain of the method's safety, seek expert advice.

2.

Follow this instruction. Do not skip any step within the sub-procedures, otherwise there may be a potentially dangerous situation, which you have not considered.

3.

Proper work and personal safety equipment must be used. These include e.g. helmet, gloves and safety harness. Avoid wearing loose or unbuttoned clothing. All necessary control and access keys, tools and equipment must be ready on hand, the latter must be placed where they present no hazard to the public or other persons. If there is risk of injury from a fall, an adequate fall prevention system must be in place.

4.

Ensure the elevator is free of traffic before taking elevator out of service. In the case of passengers already being present within the car, the service technician should ride with them, taking over key control of the elevator and deliver them to their required floor stops. Passengers waiting at landings should be directed to an alternative elevator.

5.

Once free of passengers, out of service indicators should be illuminated and notices must be placed in clearly visible position at every landing and for every door.

6.

Check that the car does not move when the landing pushes are pressed with the car doors closed.

7.

Use barriers to segregate your work area so that your work does not cause a hazard to others. In particular keep access ways and fire exits clear.

8.

When it is necessary to open the landing doors with the car away from the floor, safety barriers must always be placed, before opening of doors, so as to prevent the public or other non-maintenance personnel gaining access to the open door area.

9.

NOTE :- Appropriate safe working methods and protection must be used in areas where there are open landing entrances.

10.

Before entering the elevator pit: • The landing and pit areas must be properly illuminated. • The pit entry maintenance safety switch must be turned OFF, to prevent possible car movement. • Check that the floor surface is free of dirty liquids, old rags, waste or discarded materials.


22 ( 95 )


3.1.6

Pre-Maintenance Procedures

Continued

11.

Following the above precautions, entry to the pit must be made only by means of the proper access route. NOTE :- In using of ladders, additional care must be taken. It should always be ensured that they are free from oil or other slippery materials and that the user himself has dry hands and is not wearing slippery or oily footwear.

12.

Before boarding the elevator car roof: • The landing area must be properly illuminated. • The maintenance stop switch on the car top control station must be pressed to its self-latching OFF position, to prevent possible car movement. • The car top control inspection switch must be rotated to its 'INSP.' position. • The car top inspection light must be illuminated. • Check must be made that the car roof is clean and dry - particularly free of oil spillage or other slippery materials. Also, the maintenance person must not wear slippery or oily footwear NOTE :- A slippery car roof causes a high risk of dangerous and even fatal accidents. While at the car top, check that car top rope pulley guards are properly in place.

Only after pre-maintenance procedures have been completed, can maintenance procedures commence.


23 ( 95 )


3.1.7

During Maintenance

1.

One person should be in charge of control and access keys and responsible for safe and appropriate car movements as and when required;

2.

NOTE: Where necessary movements are decided by the responsible person, he must properly inform fellow workers of the intended movements before making them. Or, if he is working under instructions, only make changes in control settings or initiate any car movements when he is certain that he has clearly heard and understood requirements and that the required action will not cause any hazard for colleagues.

3.

Always switch off the current before attempting the cleaning or adjusting of rotating machinery;

4.

When inspecting rotating equipment while it is moving, be especially careful of the “nip points” such as between ropes and sheaves;

5.

DO NOT have tools or components all over the floor which may create a tripping hazard;

6.

Exercise great care if working on live electrical equipment and use live working procedures with appropriate tools and protective clothing.

7.

DO NOT “short cut” control safety circuits with a wire hooked onto the terminals or by a temporary shorting bridge;

8.

Close and secure machine room doors when the room is unoccupied;

9.

Keep the landing entrance gates or doors closed always when the lift car is away from floor level, except when working at a particular entrance;

9.

DO NOT use a naked flame in the lift well. Observe “no smoking” rules.


24 ( 95 )


3.1.8

After-Maintenance Procedures

After completion of maintenance work the following steps MUST be followed: 1.

It must be verified that all key operated controls are properly reset to their normal service status settings and that all keys have been removed and are held in safekeeping for return to their designated storage location.

2.

Maintenance work, either in the pit or from the car top, check must be made that all stop and inspection switches have been properly reset to their normal service status settings and that all inspection lights are switched off.

3.

When any landing doors have been opened, with the car away from floor level, it must be positively verified that they are securely closed and latched.

NOTE :- A test should always be made that doors cannot be re-opened by hand. 4.

It must be ensured that:  Any spillage within or outside the elevator well have been thoroughly wiped up.  All waste has been cleared up for removal to an authorised disposal point.  All spare materials have been collected for transfer to approved storage.  No extra material (like spares and tools) are left on car roof. The car roof is not a storage area.  All tools, equipment, barriers and notices have been collected for return to their correct storage locations.

5.

Before release of elevator to general service: The elevator should be driven up and down for a few journeys and the checks must be made for correct control responses, smooth and quiet operation, accurate floor levelling at all landings and correct functioning of all indicators, car lights and ventilation fan. After satisfactory results have been achieved, out of service indicators must be put out and all tools, equipment and materials finally removed from the elevator area.


25 ( 95 )


3.1.9

Cleaning

Cleaning is an important aspect of elevator maintenance. It is essential that the elevator car and the visible elevator components on the landings, especially the sill groves, are cleaned on a regular basis. The elevator car contains special materials, some of which are not resistant to powerful cleaners such as solvents. Instructions on the cleaning of the elevator are given in this section.

3.1.9.1

Caution

Never use strong solvents, corrosive or strong alkaline substances when cleaning the elevator car. These substances can damage the interior materials. Acetone and thinners are particularly harmful for the plastic parts in the elevator car.

Note

Always follow the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) instructions for the cleaning product, to prevent adverse health effects.

Warning

Do not attempt to clean the insides of the elevator shaft or the Maintenance Access Panel. These MUST be left to competent maintenance persons.

Cleaning The Walls

Material Coated metal

Metal laminate

Method Use a soft cloth, careful rinsing and drying of the surface. Use a soft cloth. Do not use abrasive sponges.

Real wood laminates

Use a soft, damp cloth.

Recycled and wood laminates

Use a soft cloth. Do not use abrasive sponges. Use a soft duster. Avoid scratches from dry dirt or dust.

Glass mirrors

and


Cleaning substance Use water and neutral soap. Avoid solvents, for example, acetone, toluene, ethyl acetate, trichloroethylene or perchloroethylene. Use water and small amounts of neutral cleaning fluid. For resistant stains, use a mildly abrasive detergent. Do not use abrasive, acetone or strong alkaline conventional cleaning agents. Do not use, for example, abrasive cleaners, powders, scouring pads, steel wool or sandpaper, as they will mar, etch, corrode and permanently discolour real wood surfacing products. Use water and small amounts of neutral cleaning fluid. Do not use solvents, as they will melt the coating. Use a general window cleaner. Do not use abrasives.

26 ( 95 )


3.1.9.2

Cleaning The Ceiling

Material Coated metal

Stainless steel

Method Use a soft cloth, careful rinsing and drying of the surface. Use a clean sponge, soft cloth or soft fibre brush, then rinse in clean water and dry.

Polycarbonate

Use a soft duster.

Acrylic plastic

Use a spray detergent and wait 10 - 15 minutes. Wipe away with damp cloth. Do not rub with dry cloth or abrasive sponges.

3.1.9.3

Cleaning substance Use water and neutral soap. Avoid solvents, for example, acetone, toluene, ethyl acetate, trichloroethylene or perchloroethylene. Use soap, detergent or dilute (1%) ammonia solution in warm clean water. For finger prints, use detergent and warm water. For stubborn spots, stains and light discoloration, use mild, non-scratching creams and polishes. Use general cleaners. Do not use strong solvents, for example, acetone, as they will dissolve the ceiling. Use domestic dishwashing detergents. Do not use detergents containing acetone or ammonia.

Cleaning The Floor

Material Wood laminates, recycled laminates, real wood

Method Use a vacuum cleaner, broom or antistatic cloth. Always use a damp cloth, never wet. Do not use abrasive sponges.

Composite stone

Use a vacuum cleaner, broom or antistatic cloth. Do not use abrasive sponges. Use a vacuum cleaner or broom. Use a wet cloth for the cleaning operation.

Rubber, vinyl


Cleaning substance Use mild, non-abrasive detergent; domestic abrasive creamy detergents; ammonia; methylated spirit mixed with water. For difficult stains, for example, tar, ink, shoe polish, lipstick or nail-polish, use a clean soft cloth moistened with nail-polish remover (acetone), methylated spirit or other domestic solvent. For dry glue residue, use nail-polish remover (acetone). For materials like chewing gum and candle wax, leave to get completely hard then gently scrape it off. Do not use abrasive detergents, floor waxes or polishes, soapy detergents, or excessive water on the working area. Use water with small amount of neutral cleaning fluid. For extraordinary cleaning, use an alkaline detergent. Follow the instructions provided with the detergent in question. Use water with a small amount of detergent (2dl of detergent per 10litres of water). Remove stains while they are still fresh. Do not use washing machines with abrasive discs.

27 ( 95 )


3.1.9.4

Cleaning The Handrails And Buffer Rails

Material Stainless steel

Method Use a clean sponge, soft cloth or soft fibre brush, then rinse in clean water and dry.

Anodised aluminium Wood

Use a soft duster.

3.1.9.5

Use a clean sponge, soft cloth or soft fibre brush, then rinse in clean water and dry.

Cleaning substance Use soap, detergent or dilute (1%) ammonia solution in warm clean water. For finger prints, use detergent and warm water. For stubborn spots, stains or light discoloration, use mild, non-scratching creams and polishes. Use general cleaners. Use mild, non-abrasive detergent; domestic abrasive creamy detergents; ammonia; methylated (spirit) mixed with water. For difficult stains, for example, tar, ink, shoe polish, lipstick or nail-polish, use a clean soft cloth moistened with nail-polish remover (acetone), methylated spirit or other domestic solvent. For dry glue residue, use nail-polish remover (acetone). For materials like chewing gum and candle wax, leave to get completely hard then gently scrape it off. Do not use abrasive detergents, floor waxes or polishes, soapy detergents, or excessive water on the working area.

Cleaning The Seat

Material Wood laminates, recycled laminates

Method Use a vacuum cleaner, broom or antistatic cloth. Always use a damp cloth, never wet. Do not use abrasive sponges.

Anodised aluminium

Use a soft duster.


Cleaning substance Use mild, non-abrasive detergent; domestic abrasive creamy detergents; ammonia; methylated (spirit) mixed with water. For difficult stains, for example, tar, ink, shoe polish, lipstick and nail-polish, use a clean soft cloth moistened with nail-polish remover (acetone), methylated spirit or other domestic solvent. For dry glue residue, remove with nail-polish remover (acetone). For materials like chewing gum and candle wax, leave to get completely hard then gently scrape off. Do not use abrasive detergents, floor waxes or polishes, soapy detergents, or excessive water on the working area. Use general cleaners.

28 ( 95 )


3.1.9.6

Cleaning The Signalisation Note

Caution Material Coated metal

Stainless steel

Brass Polycarbonate Acrylic plastic

Buttons


Always cover the buttons before cleaning the surrounding parts with liquids or strong solvents.

Do not use strong or hydrocarbon solvents. They will damage the buttons.

Method Use soft cloth, accurate rinsing and drying of the surface Use a clean sponge, soft cloth or soft fibre brush, then rinse in clean water and dry. Use soft duster. Do not use abrasives. Avoid scratching. Use soft duster Spray detergent and wait 10 - 15 minutes. Wipe away with damp cloth. Do not rub with dry cloth or abrasive sponges. Use a moist soft duster.

Cleaning substance Water and neutral soap. Avoid solvents such as acetone, toluene, ethyl acetate, trichloroethylene, perchloroethylene. Soap, detergent or dilute (1%) ammonia solution in warm clean water can be used. In case of finger prints, use detergent and warm water. For stubborn spots, stains, light discoloration use mild non scratching creams and polishes. Lacquer cleaner, for example, hard wax (without polishing effects). General cleaners. Never use strong solvents such as acetone as they will melt the surface. Domestic dishwashing detergents. Do not use detergents containing acetone or ammonia.

General cleaners. Never use strong solvents, such as acetone, as they will damage the buttons.

29 ( 95 )


3.1.9.7

Cleaning The Tenant Directory

Your elevator may be equipped with a tenant directory that contains the building tenant information. Cleaning the tenant directory is described in the table below. Also described is how to change the information sheet. Material Polycarbonate

Method Use a soft duster.

Anodised aluminium

Use a soft duster.

Cleaning substance Use general cleaners. Do not use strong solvents, for example, acetone, as they will melt the surface. Use general cleaners.

1079111.wmf

1079109.wmf

1. 2. 3. 4.

3.1.9.8

Release the frame fixing with a screwdriver. Pull the frame to access the information sheet. Replace the information sheet. Push the frame to lock it back in place.

Changing Elevator Lighting

It may be possible to change the elevator lighting, with the help of your building's maintenance personnel. If you wish to know more of this possibility, please contact your KONE Service Centre for advice.


30 ( 95 )


3.1.10

Inspections By Competent Persons

It is a requirement of the Health and Safety at Work Act that certain items of plant are examined closely at specified intervals. These examinations are detailed within the SAFed Guidelines on the Supplementary Tests on In-Service Elevators, previously known as “LG1” Regulation 9 of The Lifting Operations and Lifting Equipment Regulations 1998 (LOLER) requires that all lifts provided for use in work activities are thoroughly examined by a competent person at regular intervals. Further guidance is available from The Safety Assessment Federation Unit 4, First Floor, 70 South Lambeth Road, Vauxhall, London, SW8 1RL

E-mail [email protected] Tel 020 7582 3208 Fax 020 7735 0286 www.safed.co.uk

HSE Information Services, Caerphilly Business Park Caerphilly CF83 3GG

E-mail [email protected] Tel 0845 345 0055 Fax 0845 408 9566 www.hse.gov.uk

Refer to leaflet INDG339

The owner/occupier of the building should make arrangements with a competent person to undertake the examinations and ensure that a copy of the resultant report is kept in a safe place on site. Such reports may be filed in Section 1.4 of this manual.


31 ( 95 )


3.1.11

Preventative Maintenance

Preventive maintenance is crucial to maintain the safety of the elevator. Regular checks of your elevator's safety equipment help to locate defective components before they cause hazards. As the owner of the building you should make sure that your building is safe for persons that need to use it. A preventive maintenance plan ensures the following: • Equipment performance and availability • Consistent high levels of safety for elevator users • Minimal costs associated with breakdowns • Value retention of your investment The following table describes the items and procedures for preventive maintenance checks Item to be maintained Pit area

Buffers Machine Main rope diverter pulleys Suspension ropes Rope terminations Traction sheave and diverter pulleys Electrical panels

Electric wiring

Current, voltage and speed Signalization Overspeed governor

Elevator car Car guide shoes


Procedures Ensure that the pit is clean, dry and free of debris. Remove any water from the pit bottom. Check that pit components are not wet. Ensure that the elevator shaft keeps dry. Check that the buffers are in good condition and fixed firmly in position. Check that the machine is clean and operates smoothly. Check the grooves for wear. Check bearings for wear. Check for wear, equal tension and elongation Check carefully for deterioration, wear and security. Check for fractures and tightness. Check the grooves for wear. Check bearings for wear Check that the cabinet is clean, dry, and free of dust and locked. Check wires for signs of breakage. Check that safety covers are in place. Check insulation to avoid dangerous situations. Check electrical continuity between the earth terminal and any elevator part potentially becoming electrically live. All wiring must be securely fastened. Measure when necessary. Check the operation of push buttons and displays. Note! After activating the car safety gears always move car upwards about 150 mm by RDF to allow releasing of safety gear. Check the operation of anticreeping device. Check emergency lighting and alarm devices. Check decoration condition. Check for wear, replace if needed. Check the lubricating equipment.

32 ( 95 )


3.1.11

Preventative Maintenance

Continued

Item to be maintained Landing entrances

Final limit switches Car door operations

Floor level Machine run time limiter Machine protection devices Electric safety devices

Alarm devices Low Pit and headroom devices, Safety Space Arrangement SSA**E EBD (optional)


Procedures Check every landing lock for smooth operation and security. Check that the doors run freely. Check for any excessive wear and gaps. Check emergency release mechanism, all pulleys and diverters and door ropes. Check the safety contact for proper operation. Check for correct positioning and operation. Check that the contacts work correctly. Check for free movement. Check for any excessive wear and gaps. Check emergency release mechanism, all pulleys, diverters and door belts. Check the closing force limiter and curtain of light or photo cell for proper operation. Check the stopping accuracy. Check for correct operation. Check for correct operation. Check all safety devices: • Car top stop button • Pit stop button • Overspeed governor slack rope switch • Safety gear switch • Run buttons in MAP and in control unit at car roof • UCM detector functioning and resetting Check for correct operation. Check the operation if applicable. The functionality of EBD can be tested during a maintenance visit only if the elevator supply cable is equipped with a separate connector, installed before the battery drive unit.

33 ( 95 )


3.1.12

Planned Periodic Maintenance Note

The frequency of the maintenance item inspections is decided by the maintenance company. The checks are not at fixed intervals

ITEM

HOISTING MACHINE Rope guards Operation of machine stop button Wear of traction sheave grooves and suspension ropes Machine: Tightness of the fastenings Machine: Function of brake and manual release device Machine: Bearings and seals Machine: Fan Control panel documents Control system: condition and operation of devices Control system: cables and mountings Control system: UCM Control system: Stopping accuracy and relevelling PIT AND SHAFT EQUIPMENT Guide rails and fixings Counterweight: guide shoes and guide lubricators (if used) Counterweight: rope suspension, diverting pulley, diverting pulley bearing Overspeed governor and rope Shaft protection (well flush panels if used) Electrical installations and travelling cables Floor positioning devices Limit switches Lighting, ventilation and drainage Buffers Shaft pit (check that the pit bottom is water tight) Tension weights: fixings, operation


INSPECTION (condition / operation check)

x x x

ACTIONS TO BE MADE IF NECESSARY LUBRICATION ADJUSTING CLEANING

x (ropes – see Section 3.1.13.2)

x x

x (ropes)

x

x x x x

x

x x x

x

x x x x x x x x

34 ( 95 )

x

x (guide rails) x

x (fixings)

x

x

x

(no lubrication)

x

x x x (inside)

(no lubrication)

x x x x

x

x x

x x

x x (no lubrication)

x

x


3.1.12

Planned Periodic Maintenance

ITEM

SLING AND CAR EQUIPMENT Car sling: bolts/joints/bearings Fixing of car sling, insulators Guide shoe fixings and condition Guide lubricators (if used) Roller guides fixings and conditions, car and counterweight Mounting of suspension ropes

Function of safety gear (also counterweight safety gear if provided) Retiring ramp: fixing and operation Service drive operations Car roof (outside) Electrical installations Surface of car walls Car floor: load weighing devices, coatings Car lighting and ventilation and fans Safety circuit: mechanical devices Safety circuit: electrical devices Push buttons and displays Emergency situation test (alarm devices and roof emergency hatch if used) Handrails, mirrors and other car equipment Car doors and gates (locking and operator) Door way safety devices (safety edges, light rays) FLOOR LEVEL EQUIPMENT Push buttons, displays and alarm bell Door locks, guide shoes, sills, panels and fixings Door operation and equipment TEST DRIVE Operation, noise, ride comfort, stopping accuracy

Continued INSPECTION (condition / operation check)

x x x x x x

x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x

x x (re-filling)

x x x

x (ropes – see Section 3.1.13.2) x

x

x (joints)

x

x

x

x

x

x x x

x

x1

x

x x

x

x

x x

x

x

x1

x

x

x

x

X

1

The lock is not adjustable. © 2015 KONE plc All rights reserved

ACTIONS TO BE MADE IF NECESSARY LUBRICATION ADJUSTING CLEANING

35 ( 95 )


3.1.13

Lubrication

3.1.13.1

Lubrication of Guide Rails

The following table describes the viscosity requirements for lubrication at various temperatures: Operation Temperature [°C] -20 - +5 -5 - +35 +30 - +50

Note

3.1.13.2

Lubricating Oil Viscosity 68cSt / 40°C ISO VG-320 ISO VG-460

The lubrication oil must not contain any EP (extreme pressure) additives, such as molybdenum disulphide or sulphur phosphorus or viscosity index improvers such as polyisobutylene as this will reduce the braking force of the safety gear.

Lubrication of Suspension Ropes

The requirement for rope lubrication depends on the operating conditions, the usage of the elevator and the amount of the original lubricant on the rope. Too dry ropes will allow rapid sheave and rope wear, whereas excess oil on the ropes can make the nearby surfaces dirty and slippery and may thus cause hazardous situations.

Note

There may be no need to renew the lubrication, if enough lubricant exists after previous lubrication and the lubricant is still fluid.

The need for the re-lubrication can be assessed for example by observing the following: • The ropes are dry • Red dust (rust) on the ropes or on the floor • Metal dust under sheave or pulley • The grooves of the pulleys are dry and not tacky (no oil film on fingertip when wiping) Use the lubricants recommended by elevator rope manufacturers. Take care not to get lubricant on the brake drum.


36 ( 95 )


3.1.14

Maintenance Of An Elevator Having Stand-by Mode Enabled

Some KONE elevators are equipped with a stand-by mode, which enables the elevator to achieve significant energy savings. If the elevator has XL1 plugs in the Maintenance Access Panel (MAP), they must be connected to disable the stand-by mode before starting the maintenance work. NOTE! • • •

The following features can be used even when the elevator is in stand-by mode: Inspection drive unit on the car roof Recall Drive Feature (RDF) Rescue operation (door zone LED and speed LEDs)

1074555.wmf

Note

The following features can be used even when the elevator is in stand-by mode: • Inspection drive unit on the car roof. • RDF. • Rescue operation: door zone and speed LEDs.

When the maintenance work has been finished, disconnect the plugs before putting the elevator back into normal use. If this is not done, energy saving is not possible.


37 ( 95 )


3.1.15

Environment

Elevators have an impact on the environment during their lifetime in the course of material and energy use as well as waste and emissions in manufacturing, installation and service. In KONE our policy is to develop and supply environmentally sound products.

3.1.15.1 KONE's Environmental Policy KONE are conscious of the problems facing our environment and as a global organisation feel that it is our duty to take care of and protect it. We do this through our operating practices and by developing environmentally-sound products and services. We feel that it is everyone's responsibility to ensure, and continually improve, efficient and economical use of all available natural resources.

3.1.15.2 Building Efficiency Your KONE elevator is an example of our environmental policy in practice and it shows how product innovations can minimise environmental degradation in building construction. Eliminating the need for a machine room, this elevator can be fitted into the building with minimum space requirements, saving costs compared with traditional elevator solutions. This is our contribution to the customer’s wish to make buildings more efficient and more environmentally friendly.

3.1.15.3 Energy Savings In accordance with regulations concerning the emissions of "greenhouse gases" and requirements for energy savings, the machine combined with the new control unit uses significantly less energy than a traditional traction machine with the same lifting power. Energy savings have characterised the design of the entire life cycle of this product. The light and compact hoisting machine, together with the elimination of the machine room, saves much of the considerable energy consumed in the production of materials for a traditional traction elevator. The elevator also has an optional feature that switches off the elevator car lights when it has been idle for a few minutes. The energy consumed by an elevator depends on the load, speed, travel height, average travel, traffic density, elevator technology and moving masses, for example, car and counterweight. This document consequently does not include energy consumption figures. For more information on the power supply requirements, for example, voltage, frequency, maximum current and power, refer to the drawings in Section 2.1.

3.1.15.4 Long Lasting Product The machine operates without lubricating oil. The construction of the machine is simple, assuring a long and reliable life span, a quality required of environmentally friendly products. KONE elevators are predominantly manufactured from recyclable materials.


38 ( 95 )


3.1.15.5

Materials Used In The Elevator

Elevators are composed mainly of different metals, for example, steel and cast iron. Some, aluminium, bronze and copper, are used in specific components. Decorative materials are the same as can be found in building interiors, for example, coated steel sheets, laminated panels, glass and rubber. There are a number of different electronic components as well as plastics. The following table lists common hazardous materials and their frequency of use in elevators. Please note: A KONE MonoSpace elevator may contain following hazardous materials Oil None. Lead battery Yes Fluorescent tubes (containing Mercury) Occasionally Asbestos None.

Note

3.1.15.6

Make sure that the elevator maintenance company has proper waste management procedures. Elevator ropes and other metal components are recyclable. Lead batteries and fluorescent tubes are hazardous waste.

Packaging Materials

Elevator components are packed in wooden boxes. Cardboard, plastic films and polystyrene have been used to protect small parts from damaging during the transportation and handling. KONE has taken care of disposal of packages at the installation of the elevator. Packaging materials have been sorted and recycled whenever possible according to local circumstances.

3.1.15.7

Final disposal of an elevator

The dismantling and disposal of an elevator should be undertaken by a specialist company. Please note following instructions: • Remove lead battery and fluorescent tubes, when present. Dispose these materials according to local hazardous waste management procedures. • Separate metals and other recyclable materials from non-recyclable materials. • Arrange recycling and disposal of materials with a professional waste management company. • If the elevator is to be replaced with a new elevator, contact KONE for the installation of a new elevator and recycling and disposal of old elevator components.


39 ( 95 )


3.1.16

Additional Maintenance For Vandal Resistant Elevators

Note :- If this elevator complies with BS EN 81-71, it will be listed on the Declaration of Conformity included in Section 1.1. This section is only applicable to those elevators. Vandal Resistant elevators compliant with BS EN 81-71 (Category 1 or Category 2) require additional maintenance procedures to ensure that any damage is detected before a dangerous situation is reached. In addition to the maintenance and cleaning procedures mentioned in the previous sections, the following shall be undertaken: • • • • • •

The owner / occupier shall undertake regular checks of the elevator to detect any damage. Damage should be reported to the maintenance company immediately. Any damage should be quickly repaired. The degree of damage must be assessed and the elevator removed from service if it presents a danger. The floor in the elevator car must be kept clean and dry. The elevator, landing areas and access ways must be kept free of combustible materials. The maintenance company must perform additional examination of load bearing components, including the sling and car and landing door shoes, to detect any corrosion.

Note that a second key will be required to unprotect the emergency unlocking triangle at the landing entrances.


40 ( 95 )


3.1.17

Spare Parts

There are no spares required to be held on site as all spares are available from KONE Customer Service. Spares may be ordered via the KONE website:

www.kone.com/spares

The KONE plc service centre may be contacted by telephoning :- 08451 999999 When ordering spare parts, please state:1. Site Address 2. KONE Elevator Number (See Cover Page or Section 1.2) Note :- If a maintenance and servicing contract is in force, some parts may be available under the terms of the contract. Contact the KONE plc Call centre on 0800 652 0692. The EC-type examination certificate is valid only if the correct type of components and procedures are used in safety component manufacturing and repair. In order to ensure safety and conformity, it is essential to use original KONE spare parts only. Note


KONE disclaims any liability resulting from possible safety risks or injuries caused by the use of other than KONE original spare parts.

41 ( 95 )


3.2

Maintenance Instructions For Safety Components

3.2.1

Landing Door Locks

The following table describes the maintenance procedures for your elevator’s R1 low duty door and R2 mid duty door landing door lock. Item Landing door lock and contacts.


Procedures Check the lock function. The lock is not adjustable. 1. The landing lock must keep the door closed, move freely and close by itself. 2. The safety circuit must be interrupted if the door opens. 3. Lock hook and beak must be a minimum of 7mm (X) when the contact operates. 4. Contact bridge must push the door contact surface a minimum of 3mm (Y). 5. Free play between lock hook and lock beak must be a nominal 2mm (Z). 6. Contacts (B, C) must be clean and have minimal wear, meaning metal visible. 7. Contact bridge must be aligned to the middle of contactor holes, not touching the hole edges. 8. Electrical terminations must be tight and secure. 9. Lock hook buffers (A) must be in place and have enough material to prevent noise. Lock hook must touch buffer. 10. Lock rollers must roll easily, not stick. 11. Lock gap must not impede the door contact function. 12. End buffers (D) must be intact and in one piece.

42 ( 95 )


3.2.1

Landing Door Locks


Continued

43 ( 95 )


3.2.2

Car Door Locks

KONE can provide a car door lock when required to comply with the safety code. describes the maintenance procedures for your elevator’s car door lock. Item Landing door lock and contacts.


The following table

Procedures Check the lock function. The lock is not adjustable. 1. The car lock must keep the door closed. 2. The safety circuit must be interrupted if the door opens. 3. Lock hook (B) and beak overlap must be a minimum of 7mm (X) when the contact operates. 4. Contact bridge must push the door contact surface a minimum of 3mm (Y). 5. Free play between lock hook and lock beak must be a nominal 2mm (Z). 6. Contacts must be clean and have minimal wear, meaning metal visible. 7. Contact bridge must be aligned to the middle of contactor holes, not touching the hole edges. 8. Electrical terminations must be tight and secure. 9. Lock hook (B) must move freely when pushing the lock vane (A).

44 ( 95 )


3.2.3

Safety Gear

3.2.3.1

AQ32 Safety Gear

Object and maintenance procedure Check the operating condition of the safety gear. Check the operation of the safety gear contact. Check the distance of gripping wedge to the guide rail. Check the system function Overspeed governor – Safety gear with empty car and at reduced speed.

Checking Interval Once a year. Once a year. Twice a year. Every other year unless for example dirty or humid circumstances require more frequent testing. Safety measure: Every other year unless for example dirty or humid circumstances that require Overall checking and adjusting must be done after each tripping. more frequent testing. See ‘Inspection of the safety gear and wedges’ After every operation of overspeed governor and safety gear check that safety gear (and overspeed governor) is operational before putting the lift Notice in normal service. Note


Replace both safety gears as a pair after 12 trippings (100% load, full speed).

45 ( 95 )


3.2.3.1 AQ32 Safety Gear

Continued

Inspection of the safety gear and wedges

Steps 1–3 1077699.wmf

1. Clean the wedges if dusty and oily. Clean any iron particles that may be present. 2. Check for cracks. The surface of the wedges must not have cracks. 3. Check the overall wear of the wedge. Replace both safety gears, as a pair, after 12 trippings (100% load. full speed). 4. Check the governor rope fixing and the screw joint between the rope fixing and the lever. 5. Check that the fixing screws are not loose and that the lever is not bent or broken. Inspection of the safety gear sideward movement 1. Check that the safety gear can move sideways. 2. Ensure that the counter wedge can contact the guide rail when the safety gear engages.


46 ( 95 )


3.2.3.1

AQ32 Safety Gear

Continued

Checking the gripping wedge position 1. Check that the fixing for the lifting lever rests against the safety gear block and the gripping wedge is in position. The correct position is shown below:

2. Check the guide rail clearance on both sides. X and Y must be 2-3mm. Adjust (*) if required.


47 ( 95 )


3.2.3.2

CSGB-01 Safety Gear

Object and maintenance procedure Check the operating condition of the safety gear. Check the operation of the safety gear contact. Check the distance of gripping wedge to the guide rail. Check the system function Overspeed governor – Safety gear with empty car and at reduced speed.

Checking Interval Once a year. Once a year. Twice a year. Every other year unless for example dirty or humid circumstances require more frequent testing. Safety measure: Every other year unless for example dirty or humid circumstances that require Overall checking and adjusting must be done after each tripping. more frequent testing. See ‘Inspection of the safety gear and wedges’ After every operation of overspeed governor and safety gear check that Notice safety gear (and overspeed governor) is operational before putting the lift in normal service.


48 ( 95 )


3.2.3.2

CSGB-01 Safety Gear

Continued

Replacement intervals The following table lists the number of trippings after which the complete safety gear units have to be changed.

Warning

For safety, do not disassemble or alter the safety gear. Synchronisation is allowed, but must be carried out properly and the functioning of the safety gear must not be compromised. It is forbidden to replace faulty or worn components of the safety gear yourself. Always replace both safety gears as a pair of complete units.

Tripping type (car safety gear)

Tripping speed (m/s)

Number of trippings

≤ 1.00

25

1.01 – 1.75

9

≤ 1.65

12

1.66 – 2.56

5

≤ 1.00

50

1.01 – 1.75

25

125 % load, nominal speed 100 % load, overspeed Empty car


A

5

6

8 B 3 2

4

7 1 1 2 3 4 5

Tripping wedge Brake lining Fixing for lifting lever Disk spring Adjustment screw


6 7 8 A B

Split pin Block Lead seal Normal position Gripping position

49 ( 95 )

1079064.wmf


3.2.3.2

CSGB-01 Safety Gear

Continued

1. Check the brake shoe and guide rail for free running and adjust if necessary. 2. Check brake lining for damage or high degree of wear. For more information on the replacement criteria, see “Replacement Intervals” above. 3. Check the safety gear and surrounding components for damage, deformation or heavy oxidation (rust). 4. Check that the tripping wedge can move freely. 5. Check axial play and turning capacity of the safety gear shaft. 6. Check the actuating mechanism and guide rail connection for free movement and proper functioning. 7. Check the governor rope fixing and the screw joint between the rope fixing and the lever. Check that the fixing screws are not loose and that the lever is not bent or broken. 8. Clean the safety gear and surroundings if dust, oil or iron scrap exists. Inspection of the safety gear sideward movement 1. Check that the safety gear can move sideways. 2. Ensure that the counter wedge can contact the guide rail when the safety gear engages. Checking the gripping wedge position

1078718.wmf

Check that the fixing for the lifting lever rests against the safety gear block and the gripping wedge is in position.


Check the guide rail clearance on both sides. X and Y must be 2 -3 mm. Adjust if necessary.

50 ( 95 )


3.2.3.3

USG-25P or SGB 08 Safety Gear

Visual checks (at least once a year) Check that there are no defects that can impair the normal running of the elevator. • The roller is in place • The brake lining is in place • There are no visual defects • There are no friction marks on the roller Operating condition check (at least once a year) • Pull the lifting lever manually, from the car roof, to check that the moveable rollers are able to grip the car to the guide rails and open the safety gear contact. After the check reset the contact for normal service. System function check • Check the system function Overspeed governor - Safety gear with empty car and at reduced speed every other year unless for example dirty or humid circumstances require more frequent testing. Notice


After every operation of overspeed governor and safety gear check that safety gear (and overspeed governor) is operational before putting the lift in normal service. If the movable roller (see item 3 in the above figure) is damaged or broken replace the whole safety gear assembly

51 ( 95 )


3.2.3.4

SGB 01, 02, 03 and 05 Safety Gears

Object and Maintenance Procedure Check the operating condition of the safety gear. (wedges must be clean and move freely) Check the operation of the safety gear contact. Check the system function Overspeed governor Safety gear with empty car and at reduced speed Notice

Checking Intervals Once a year Once a year Every other year unless for example dirty or humid circumstances require more frequent testing.

After every operation of overspeed governor and safety gear check that safety gear (and overspeed governor) is operational before putting the lift in normal service.



52 ( 95 )


3.2.3.4

SGB 01, 02, 03 and 05 Safety Gears

Continued

Inspection of the governor rope fixing and synchronisation

Lift the lever up and check that the wedges of the safety gear start to move and grip exactly at the same time on both ends. Also check the operation of the safety gear switch. NOTE! It is important that the wedges return back to the normal position after lifting up. • • •

Check the governor rope fixing and the screw joint between the rope fixing and the lever check that the fixing screws are not loose check that the lever is not bent or broken


53 ( 95 )


3.2.4

MX 10 Machine Brake

The machine is equipped with two direct acting drum brakes. The brakes operate independently and must therefore be adjusted separately. The brakes only operate after the machine has stopped, except in an emergency braking situation. The brake torque is not adjustable. Notice

All safety measures for normal elevator maintenance must be implemented and local safety regulations must be obeyed.

Warning

Activate the emergency stop on car roof (and on machine, if applicable) to avoid unexpected movement of the car.

Warning

The car must always be secured using the car blocking device (fixed to the car sling above the car) and the blocking plate (fixed to car guides rails in the headroom) when working with the brakes. Check and adjust only one brake at a time.

Notice Warning

Use the manual brake releasing device carefully, because the lift will accelerate very rapidly.

Notice

Ensure that the washer under the centre nut of the brake is loose and movable by hand. This ensures that the brake is closed when the lift is standing still. NOTE! Fastening the centre nut too tightly will prevent the braking effect or cause stopping problems (For example overshooting, run to final limit). Always keep the control cabinet / maintenance access panel door closed when not working there.

Warning Warning

Monospa.wmf

MX 10

MX10 (shim plate adjustment) Due to differences between machine types, actual components may differ from those illustrated.


54 ( 95 )


3.2.3

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

Object and maintenance procedure Check the air gap between the brake lining and the drum. Excessive “clonking” sound when brake engages also indicates too big air gap. Check the operation of manual brake opening device. Check the overall cleanness of the machine. Check that there is no excess oil in the ropes because this might drift to brake drum. Check the torque (sufficient friction) of the brake. See the section “BRAKE TEST” Check the brake lining thickness. Min. thicknesses are: • MX10 4 mm

Checking Intervals

Every 6 months.

10 years

STROKE LENGTH NOTE!

The MX 10 machine can be equipped with two different brake types: • Brake with springs • Brake without springs (shim plate adjusted) For information on MX10 brake without springs, see later in this section. 4821c.wmf 1069246.wmf

1.

OPENING THE BRAKE

Original MX 10

Open the brake fully by tightening the centre nut (A). Tightening torques: MX 10 90 Nm

MX 10 with shim plates

A

ASG0405014b.wmf

2.

CHECKING THE AIR GAP

0.05 mm < 0.10 mm

Measure the air gap between the brake lining and the drum by sliding a feeler gauge round the air gap. If the air gap is >0.05 mm but <0.10 mm, close the brake. (go to point 6, Closing the brake). asg0405014c.wmf

If the air gap is <0.05 mm, or air gap >0.10 mm) adjust the air gap (continue at point 3, Removing lock plates). © 2015 KONE plc All rights reserved

55 ( 95 )


3.2.3 3.

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

REMOVING LOCK PLATES

Remove the plates that lock the adjustment screws.

1003332.wmf

4

AIR GAP ADJUSTING SCREWS

The air gap is to be adjusted from one end at a time by alternately turning the two adjusting screws at the upper and lower ends. The adjusting screws are very sensitive. (1/4 turn corresponds to 0.25mm change in the air gap).

1. 0,10mm

2.

3.

0,05mm

0,05mm

ASG0405014a.wmf

5

1. Set the air gap at the upper end to 0.10 mm. 2. Set the air gap at the lower end to 0.05 mm. 3. Set the air gap at the upper end to 0.05 mm. INSTALLING LOCK PLATES

Secure the position of the adjustment screws with the lock plates.

6

B A

CLOSING THE BRAKE

asg0405014e.wmf

Loosen the centre nut (A) so that the big washer (B) becomes slightly loose. The gap between the nut and the washer must be 0.5 mm or more. (The manual brake releasing system must operate so it gives the maximum limit). IMPORTANT! Notice After any adjustment always check and test the brake release operation.


56 ( 95 )


3.2.3

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

STROKE LENGTH, MX 10 with shim plates 1. OPENING THE BRAKE

Open the brake fully by tightening the centre nut. Tightening torques: MX 10 90 Nm

1069246.wmf

2. CHECKING THE AIR GAP

A

Measure the air gap (A) between the brake lining and the drum by sliding a feeler gauge round the air gap. The air gap should be between 0.15mm and 0.19mm. Adjust if needed. NOTE! Air gap means the gap at tightest position, not the average value of the gap at different points.

1069225.wmf

3. ADJUSTING THE AIR GAP WITH SHIM PLATES Loosen the fixing screws.

1069220.wmf

Add or remove shim plates.

1069219.wmf


57 ( 95 )


3.2.3

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

Tighten the fixing screws to 45Nm torque.

1069220.wmf

Measure the air gap.

A

Air gap means the gap at tightest position, not the average value of the gap at different points.

1069225.wmf

Repeat the adjustment if necessary. The air gap should be between 0.15mm and 0.19mm. NOTE! Do not place more than 1.5mm of shims at any time (1.3mm is the calculated maximum from the tolerance chain). The amount of shim plates must be equal in both the upper and lower assemblies. 4. CLOSING THE BRAKE Loosen the centre nut (A) so that the big washer (B) becomes slightly loose. The gap between the nut and the washer must be 0.5 mm or less.

B A

(The manual brake releasing system must operate so it gives the maximum limit).

1072364.wmf

Notice


IMPORTANT! After any adjustment always check and test the brake release operation.

58 ( 95 )


3.2.3

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

MANUAL BRAKE RELEASING DEVICE 1. POSITION OF BRAKE LEVERS

3

Adjust the brake levers parallel to the brake face using the set screw

Test Screw 4 2

2.

ADJUSTMENT OF CENTRE NUT

Tighten the test screw (4). 4

Adjust the centre nut (1) so that the test screw (4) slightly touches the brake body while pressing the lever by hand.

1

Screw out the test screw (4). Ensure that the washer (5) is not tight. It must be free to rotate.

4 5


59 ( 95 )


3.2.3 3.

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

POSITION OF CABLE END NUT

Adjust the nut at the cable end so that the levers at both sides lean against the set screws and the bushings are sitting flush inside the levers.

Lock Nut

Loosen the end nut 2-3 turns to slacken the cable tension slightly. Tighten the lock nut.

4.

CONTROL OF FUNCTION

Check the operation of the brake release cable by pulling the lever: • • •

The cable must release the machine brake. The car must move slowly and stop immediately when the lever is released. The lever must return to the “brake closed” position by itself.

2 1

If this does not happen, check the brake release cable for sharp bends, twists or damages in the wire rope cover.

1031763-1.wmf

IMPORTANT! Any further adjustments must be done from the cable end nut, not from the centre nut!


1 - Brake closed 2 - Brake fully open

60 ( 95 )


3.2.3

MX 10 Machine Brake

Continued

BRAKE TEST (one sided brake test) Step 1

Action Position the empty car so that the blocking pin of car blocking device is in the centre of the slot of the blocking plate.

Note

2

Engage the blocking pin.

3

Mark position of the traction sheave (brake wheel) on the motor body.

4

Open the brake on one side fully by tightening the centre nut.

5

Wait about one minute. Check for movement of the traction sheave (brake wheel). Notice

There must not be visible movement of the traction sheave (car).

If the elevator does not pass the brake test, initiate corrective measures. The brake system must pass the test before the elevator is put back in service.

6

Loosen the nut so that the washer is movable (clearance of 0.5 mm)

7

Repeat steps 2-6 on the other brake side.

8

Disengage the car blocking device.


61 ( 95 )


3.2.5 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

OL35 Overspeed Governor Flyweight Spring Eccentric wheel Flyweight catch Overspeed contact Trip wheel Contact plate Test groove Groove for normal use

5

3

1

7

1 5

2 6

3 4

1008747.wmf

The following table describes the maintenance procedures for the OL35 components Object and Maintenance Procedure 1. Cleaning (especially the flyweight springs). 2. Check the condition of the flyweights and the springs . 3. Check the operation of the overspeed contact. 4. Check the operation of the tension weight contact. 5. Check the condition of the pulley (Main) bearings. 6. Check the wear of the rope groove

Checking Intervals Once a year or when needed Once a year Once a year Once a year Once a year Once a year

Safety measures • All safety measures for normal elevator maintenance must be implemented and local safety regulations assimilated into local instructions with due regard to risk. • Activate the emergency stop on machine or on car roof (as applicable) to prevent unexpected movement of the car. • Do not lubricate the overspeed governor. Lubrication may reduce the braking force. • Do not adjust or replace any parts of the overspeed governor (Only optional remote tripping system can be replaced). • After every operation of the overspeed governor and safety gear check that overspeed governor (and safety gear) is operational.


62 ( 95 )


3.2.5

OL 35 Overspeed Governor

Continued

CHECKING THE FLYWEIGHTS AND THE SPRINGS Step 1 2

Action

Note A broken spring can cause unnecessary tripping of the overspeed governor. Dirty/rusty springs may increase the tripping speed!

Check the springs Check the operation / vertical (radial) movement of the flyweights manually: • Pull flyweights outwards. • Check that both of the eccentric wheels touch the tripping wheel (A). • Let the flyweights close by themselves. They MUST return easily without extra friction (Picture B).

A

1008782.wmf

1008778.wmf

3

Check lateral movement of the flyweights while the elevator is running: The flywheel MUST not touch the governor pulley (B) or the tripping wheel (C).

B

C

1008835.wmf


1008837.wmf

63 ( 95 )


3.2.5


Continued

CHECKING ROPE GROOVE WEAR

11

4

15

15

Groove types:

1008839.wmf

A

B

C

The overspeed governor MUST be replaced when the rope goes deeper into the groove than value (T) given in the table below. Groove type

A T

d

Rope diameter (d) 6 mm 6.5 mm 7 mm 8 mm

Maximum dimension (T) 8.5 mm 8 mm 7.5 mm 7 mm

7 mm 8 mm

3.5 mm 2.5 mm

1008842.wmf

B T

d 1008980.wmf

C T

d


1008983.wmf

64 ( 95 )


3.2.5


Continued

CHECKING OPERATION OF THE OVERSPEED CONTACT Step 1

Action Turn the contact plate (1) so that the knob of the overspeed contact is not in the notch of the contact plate.

Note (1)

1009006.wmf

2

Check that overspeed contact cuts the safety chain. Note

Elevator must not drive in the normal or inspection drive mode.

Recall drive mode (RDF) bypasses the overspeed contact

CHECKING OPERATION OF THE OVERSPEED CONTACT Step 1 2

Action Push and pull the pulley in the axial direction, use your hand. Check that the pulley does not move in the axial direction (No free play).

Note Maximum free play +/- 1 mm measured on outside diameter of the 200 mm pulley.

If there is axial free play the governor must be replaced.

1008846.wmf


65 ( 95 )


3.2.6

Polyurethane Buffers Object and Maintenance Procedure

Check the overall condition of the buffer structure.

Service Intervals Once a year

Inspection procedures 1. Ensure the buffer is clean (no dirt or debris on it). 2.

Check that buffer is intact and securely fixed (push buffer firmly sideways)

3.

Check that there are no cracks or powdering.

4.

Check that the buffer is not exposed to water, other liquid or chemicals.

5

Able to withstand a gentle hit with, for example, a hammer or wooden block or similar blunt object without suffering any damage

1078278.wmf

If any of the above conditions are not acceptable, replace the buffer. If the buffer has clearly failed, remove the elevator from service until the buffer has been replaced.


66 ( 95 )


3.2.7

Oil Buffers

Object and Maintenance Procedure Check the Oil Level. Drive the car or counterweight on the buffer and check that the piston returns to the normal position Check that the safety switch operates correctly. Inspection procedures 1 Check the oil level from the indicator (2). 2

Service Intervals Once a year Once a year Once a year

1

If the oil level does not reach the oil level indicator, remove the sealing screw (1) and add oil (type ISO VG68). Stop filling when the oil level reaches the mark (2).

3

Install the sealing screw (1) and let the buffer rest, piston compressed 40 – 50 mm.

4

Re-check the oil level from the oil level indicator (2).

5

If too much oil, 1 litre per year or more, is needed, replace the buffer

6

Clean the pit if there has been an oil leak and handle the waste in line with a sound environmental policy.

2

1081374.wmf


67 ( 95 )


3.2.8

Maintenance Instructions For Ropes

You must check the ropes for the following: • Visible breaks • Incorrect tension Checking for visible breaks requires examination according to visible wire breaks - DIN 15020 Sheet 2, Transmission Groups 2m + 5m The following table describes the rope specifications and respective visible wire breaks.

Rope specifications F819 S-FE PAWO F3 PAWO F7S

Diameter

Number of load bearing wires in outer layers

Number of visible wire breaks on a length of 6 x rope dia.

Number of visible wire breaks on a length of 30 x rope dia.

8mm

152

10

19

8mm

152

10

19

8mm

152

13

26

For overspeed governor (OSG), the rope type is 6mm diameter with fibre core. The number of load bearing wires in outer layer is 114. For further surveillance the prescriptions of DIN 15020 sheet 2 3.4 have to be observed.

Note

3.2.9

Check the national discarding criteria and checking interval for the elevator hoisting ropes. If they are more restrictive the above criteria, follow the national code.

UCM With Doors Open Prevention According To EN 81-1 A3

The elevator control system detects any Unintended Car Movement (UCM), and stops the car with the machine brakes. The UCM detection is saved in the fault log and resetting can only be performed by a competent person. To maintain UCM prevention, perform the regular machine brake maintenance and UCM periodical inspection. For more information, see Section 3.3.3 Performing One-Sided Electrical Braking Test And UCM Test 1 Of 2 (With 0% Load) and Section 3.3.4 Performing UCM Test 2 Of 2 (With 0% Load).


68 ( 95 )


3.3

Periodical Inspections

According to BS EN 81-1 Annex E, the elevator must be periodically inspected to verify it is in good condition. Inspection interval and contents should be according to local regulations. In addition to the local authorised inspector, it is recommended that a representative of the qualified maintenance company is available during inspection. If any of the tests in this document are part of the local periodical inspection procedure, follow the instructions described in this document. All periodical examinations and tests must be carried out in accordance with BS EN 81-1 Annex E. Periodical examinations and tests must not be more stringent than those required before the elevator was put into service for the first time.

Note

The periodical tests should not, through their repetition, cause excessive wear or impose stresses likely to reduce the safety of the elevator. This is the case in particular of the test on components such as the safety gear and the buffers. If tests on these components are made, they must be carried out with empty car and at a reduced speed. The person appointed to make the periodical test must assure that these components, which do not operate in normal service, are still in an operating condition.


69 ( 95 )


3.3.1

Safety

Note

Step 1

3.3.2

You must plan all work carefully in order to avoid any safety hazards or damage to the product. Perform the following actions: • Check that there is no one inside the car or in the elevator shaft during the safety inspection. • Disconnect the landing calls using the user interface during the safety inspection, so that the inspection is not interrupted and passengers are not trapped in the elevator. • Before going onto the car roof, push the car roof stop button down and turn the inspection drive unit to inspection drive before releasing the stop button. Safety tests are to be carried out by authorised persons only.

Action Place warning and information signs and safety fences as required.

Note

Tools

Ensure that you have the following tools: • Measure and feeler gauges for measurements. • Radio communication devices, or equivalent, for SAM and traction tests if necessary. • Door blocking tool. • Hand tachometer for overspeed governor tripping speed measurement. • File for removing safety gear grip marks from guide rails.


70 ( 95 )


3.3.3

Performing One-Sided Electrical Braking Test And UCM Test 1 of 2 (With 0% Load)

In a one-sided brake test, the performance of each brake unit of the hoisting machine is tested independently. Each brake alone must be able to hold the empty elevator car in position. This test also verifies that Unintended Car Movement (UCM) detection on the ADO/ACL board operates if one brake does not hold the car. The following conditions apply: • If one-sided electrical braking test passes, UCM test also passes • If one-sided electrical braking test fails and car moves, UCM detection triggers the machinery brake stopping devices and stops the car

Note

Step 1 2 3

If you cannot access the brake opening parameters, contact KONE.

Action Inhibit landing calls and door opening. Drive the empty car to the topmost floor.

Note LCEUI switches 263 and 261. The LEDs 77:U, (77:S), 61:U, 30, B30 (if through type car) and 61:N are lit.

Switch RDF (270) on (4).

4

4 5

Change the value of the 6_72 parameter to 21, brake 1 test. Push the RDF RUN and UP buttons. One brake opens for testing. The drive stops the test by itself after a maximum of 10 seconds. Monitor the SPEED LEDs at the same time.

This activates the brake 1 test for one start only. The motor does not try to run. If the car moves, UCM detection stops the car. If not, stop the test.

P09000384.wmf


71 ( 95 )


3.3.3

Step 6

Performing One-Sided Electrical Braking Test And UCM Test 1 Of 2 (With 0% Load) Continued Action Check the drive code from the error log. If the car moves or fault codes are displayed, check for possible causes. Repeat the test. If the test fails again, replace the brakes.

7

8

Change the value of the 6_72 parameter to 22 (brake 2 test). Repeat the braking test with the other brake. Record the test results.


Note Drive fault code 126, subcodes 6021: test passed Drive fault code 126, subcodes 2071: test failed If the brake test fails, UCM fault code 0005 the displays and must be reset manually. The elevator remains in fault mode after switching the power off and on. The elevator recovers only if RDF (270) is switched on and off. Switch RDF (270) off after completing the braking test for the both brakes. Record the test date and result in the elevator’s log book.

72 ( 95 )


3.3.4

Performing UCM Test 2 of 2 (With 0% Load) Warning

Ensure that no-one can enter the elevator shaft or car during this test. Someone must stay at the second topmost landing when the car stops and opens the doors. During the test, adequate communication must be maintained between all involved and at all time. All communication devices, for example, radios or mobile telephones, must be carefully checked before use.

The UCM test verifies that the UCM (Unintended Car Movement) detection on the ADO/ACL board operates and triggers the machinery brake stopping devices. The following conditions apply: • Uncontrolled movement of the car with doors open is registered and saved in the memory, in the fault log. • The elevator remains in fault mode after switching the power off and on. • The elevator recovers only if RDF (270) is switched on and off. Step 1

2 3 4

Action Place a barrier around the entrance of the floor below the topmost floor. Put warning and information signs in position. Inhibit landing calls. Call the elevator to the floor below the topmost floor. LCECPU / LOP-CB car call button. Wait until the car stops and the doors open. When the doors are fully open, pull the brake release lever carefully and raise the car above the door zone.

Note Information signs must advise others that personnel are working on the elevator and that entering the car is not allowed. LCECPU / LOP-CB switch 261.

If the doors close, re-open them by giving a call to the floor where the car is. Use the LCECPU / LOP-CB car call button.

LED 30 and LED 61 must not light. Check that the UCM is detected, fault code 0005 is displayed.

1061228.wmf

Warning

Note


The speed can increase very quickly when you open the brake. When the traction sheave starts to move, stop it by letting the brakes close every 0.5 - 1.0 second to prevent the elevator from accelerating to overspeed. Release the brake lever immediately if: • The second red overspeed LEDs in the UP or DOWN direction starts to illuminate, D64 or D67 depending on the direction.

73 ( 95 )


3.3.4 Step 5 6 7 8 9

Performing UCM Test 2 Of 2 (With 0% Load) Action Switch the power off. Wait until the elevator control system shuts down. Switch the power on. Check that the UCM is still detected, fault code 0005 is displayed. Switch RDF (270) on. Switch RDF (270) off.

Note

The elevator must not recover to normal mode. The car starts to drive and recover to normal mode. Fault code 0005 is not displayed.

Check that parameter 6_30 is set to 1. This setting makes the drive perform an automatic brake test and UCM test at least once a day. Note

10 11

Continued

Ensure that this setting is permanently on. Do not change it.

Enable landing calls. Record the test results.


LCECPU / LOP-CB switch 261. Record the test date and result in the elevator’s log book.

74 ( 95 )


3.3.5

Final Limit Switch Tests

The following sections describe the final limit switch tests for your elevator.

3.3.5.1 Step 1 2 3 4 5

Testing The Upper Limit Switch Action Travel in the car to the topmost floor. Check the levelling by measuring the sill-to-sill distance Let the doors close. Inhibit landing calls and door opening. Carefully open the machine brakes with the manual brake opening lever in the MAP.

Note Record the measurement. LCEUI switches 263 and 261.

The car moves up towards the upper limit switch and the safety circuit LED is lit in the LCEUI.

1061228.wmf

Warning

The speed can increase very quickly when you open the brake. When the traction sheave starts to move, stop it by letting the brakes close every 0.5 - 1.0 second to prevent the elevator from accelerating to overspeed.

Note

Release the brake lever immediately if: • The second red overspeed LEDs in the UP or DOWN direction starts to illuminate, D64 or D67 depending on the direction.

1076094.wmf

6

1076096.wmf

When the safety circuit LED goes off, close the brakes and switch RDF (270) on (4).

4


75 ( 95 )


3.3.5.1 Step 7 8 9

3.3.5.2 Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8

Testing The Upper Limit Switch

Continued

Action Open the landing door and measure the sill-tosill distance to verify the limit switch location. Drive the car down to landing with RDF Record the test results.

Note Record the measurement. measurement corresponds drawings.

Check that the to the layout

Record the test date and result in the elevator’s log book.

Testing The Lower Limit Switch Action Travel in the car to the topmost floor. Check that the car is empty. Inhibit landing calls and door opening. Give a car call to the lowest floor with the LCEUI. Switch RDF (270) on (4) when the car is on the lowest floor Drive the car down onto the buffer with RDF. Switch RDF (270) off.

Note

LCEUI switches 263 and 261.

4

Carefully open the machine brakes with the manual brake opening lever in the MAP. The car moves up past the lower limit switch and the safety circuit LED is lit in the LCEUI.

1061228.wmf

Warning


Note

Release the brake lever immediately if: • The second red overspeed LEDs in the UP or DOWN direction starts to illuminate, D64 or D67 depending on the direction.


76 ( 95 )


3.3.5.2

Testing The Lower Limit Switch

Continued

Step

Action

Note

9

When the safety circuit LED is lit, close the brakes and switch RDF (270) on (4).

1076094.wmf

1076096.wmf

4

10 11 12

Close the MAP. Go to the lowest landing. Open the landing door and measure the sill-tosill distance to verify the limit switch location.

13 14

Switch the elevator onto normal operation. Record the test results.


Record the measurement. measurement corresponds drawings.

Check that the to the layout


77 ( 95 )


3.3.6

Traction Tests Note

3.3.6.1 Step 1 2 3 4

Perform the test with empty car, at 0% load.

Testing Traction (1 of 2) Action Travel in the car to the topmost floor. Give a car call to the lowest landing using the LCEUI. Give a car call to the topmost landing using the LCEUI. When the elevator has reached the rated speed, switch RDF (270) on (4).

Note

P09000384.wmf

4

Note 5 7

The machine brakes must stop the car completely.

Repeat the test above twice. Record the test results.



78 ( 95 )


3.3.6.2

Testing Traction (2 of 2)

Two persons are recommended to perform this test if MAP is not on the topmost floor. The first person operates MAP and the second person observes the car movement on the topmost floor.

Note

Step 1 2 3

4

Perform the test with empty car, at 0% load.

Action Give a car call to the topmost landing using the LCEUI Switch RDF (270) on (4). Drive the counterweight on the buffer by driving up with RDF.

Open the brake to ensure that counterweight is resting on the buffer.

Note

4

the

1061228.wmf

Warning


1076094.wmf

Note


1076096.wmf

Release the lever immediately if the second speed LED in UP or DOWN direction starts to illuminate (D64 or D67 depending on the direction).

79 ( 95 )


3.3.6.2 Step 5 6

Testing Traction (2 of 2)

Continued

Action Note Fix a piece of paper to the car door so that it The paper indicates if the car moves during the projects through the landing door. test. Drive the car up with RDF approximately three The car must not move. seconds. Observe the speed LEDs in the MAP to ensure that the motor rotates or tries to rotate.

7 8 9

Drive the car back to floor level by driving down with RDF. Return the elevator to normal use. Record the test results.


P09000384.wmf


80 ( 95 )


3.3.7

Buffer Tests

3.3.7.1

Testing The Car Buffers

Step 1 2

Action Call the car to the topmost floor using car calls. Enter the pit.

Note

1. Open the landing door. 2. Remain on the landing and check that there is sufficient clearance between the pit floor and car and the landing floor and car, so you can get out of the pit. 3. Switch on the pit light. 4. Push down the pit stop switch. 5. Carefully enter the pit with ladders.

Risk of falling

Take care when entering the pit.

3

Check that the car buffer is in good condition.

4

Exit the pit.

Polyurethane buffers: • Check that there are no cracks or powdering. Oil buffers: • Check that there are no leaks. • Check the oil level of the buffer.

1. Verify that the pit stop switch is pushed down. 2. Exit the pit with ladders. 3. Remove the portable pit ladders, if applicable. 4. Release the pit stop switch. 5. Close the landing door and check that the door is mechanically locked. Risk of falling 5 6 7

Take care when exiting the pit.

Go to the topmost landing. Inhibit landing calls and door opening Send the car to the bottom floor.


LCEUI switches 263 and 261

81 ( 95 )


3.3.7.1 Step 8

Testing The Car Buffers

Continued

Action Switch RDF (270) on (4).

Note

4

9

Compress the buffer by driving down with RDF until the buffer is fully compressed and the car stops.

10

Raise the car from the buffer by driving up with RDF. Switch RDF (270) off. Enable landing calls and door operations. LCEUI switches 263 and 261 Travel in the car to the lowest landing. Call the car one floor up using car calls. Enter the pit. Activate the stop switch before entering the pit. Check that the car and the buffer are Polyurethane buffers: undamaged. • Check that there are no cracks or powdering. Oil buffers: • Check that there are no leaks. Exit the pit. Release the stop switch. Record the test results. Record the test date and result in the elevator’s log book.

11 12 13 14 15 16

17 18


Monitor the speed LEDs in LCEUI.

P09000384.wmf

82 ( 95 )


3.3.7.2 Step 1 2

Testing The Counterweight Buffer Action Call the car to the topmost floor using car calls. Enter the pit.

Note

1. Open the landing door. 2. Remain on the landing and check that there is sufficient clearance between the pit floor and car and the landing floor and car, so you can get out of the pit. 3. Switch on the pit light. 4. Push down the pit stop switch. 5. Carefully enter the pit with ladders.

Risk of falling 3

4


Check that the counterweight buffer is in good Polyurethane buffers: condition. • Check that there are no cracks or powdering. Oil buffers: • Check that there are no leaks. • Check the oil level of the buffer. Exit the pit. 1. Verify that the pit stop switch is pushed down. 2. Exit the pit with ladders. 3. Remove the portable pit ladders, if applicable. 4. Release the pit stop switch. 5. Close the landing door and check that the door is mechanically locked. Risk of falling

5


Go to the topmost landing.


83 ( 95 )


3.3.7.1 Testing The Car Buffers Step 6

Continued

Action Switch RDF (270) on (4).

Note

4

7 8

Inhibit landing calls and door opening Compress the buffer by driving up with RDF until the buffer is fully compressed and the car stops.

9 10 11 12

Switch RDF (270) off. Verify that the safety circuit is cut. Switch RDF (270) on. Raise the counterweight from the buffer by driving down with RDF. Switch RDF (270) off. Enable landing calls and door operations. LCEUI switches 263 and 261 Travel in the car to the lowest landing. Call the car one floor up using car calls. Enter the pit. Activate the stop switch before entering the pit. Check that the counterweight and the buffer Polyurethane buffers: are undamaged. • Check that there are no cracks or powdering. Oil buffers: • Check that there are no leaks. Exit the pit. Release the stop switch.

13 14 15 16 17 18

19

P09000384.wmf

Risk of falling 20

LCEUI switches 263 and 261 Monitor the speed LEDs in LCEUI.

Take care when entering and exiting the pit.

Record the test results.



84 ( 95 )


3.3.8

Overspeed Governor Tests Note

3.3.8.1 Step 1 2 3

Wear cut-resistant gloves at all times when performing the Overspeed Governor tests.

Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Car) Action Travel in the car to the lowest floor. Give a car call to one floor up.

Note Stop the car with the landing door emergency release key so that you can enter the pit. Use safety fences at the landing entrance.

Enter the pit. 1. Open the landing door. 2. Remain on the landing and check that there is sufficient clearance between the pit floor and car and the landing floor and car, so you can get out of the pit. 3. Switch on the pit light. 4. Push down the pit stop switch. 5. Close the landing door and make a landing call. 6. Open the landing door and verify that the car has not moved. 7. Ensure that landing door stays open. 8. Carefully enter the pit with ladders.

Risk of falling 4

5


Use a work stool or ladders and disconnect the Overspeed Governor wedge from the safety gear levers. Lower the rope wedge to the tension weight pulley. From OSG rope free side, pull the rope down until the fixing part reaches top section of the shaft. 1081130.wmf

Caution


If you use ladders, make sure that the ladders will not slip at the bottom of the pit.

85 ( 95 )


3.3.8.1 Step 6

Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Car) Action Let the rope wedge accelerate the Overspeed Governor rope and, at the same time by using a hand tachometer, measure the mechanical tripping speed from the Overspeed Governor rope (near the tension weight pulley).

Continued Note

Log the results.

1081131.wmf

Caution 7 8

Lower the rope wedge down. Use the work stool or ladders and reconnect the Overspeed Governor rope wedge to the safety gear levers. Caution

9

Watch out for the falling rope wedge.

If you use ladders, make sure that the ladders will not slip at the bottom of the pit.

Exit the pit. 1. Verify that the pit stop switch is pushed down. 2. Exit the pit with ladders. 3. Remove the portable pit ladders, if applicable. 4. Release the pit stop switch. 5. Close the landing door and check that the door is mechanically locked. Risk of falling

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17


Give a landing call Open the landing door with the emergency Verify that the car has not moved. key. Go to the landing where the MAP is located, use the other elevator if applicable. Open the MAP and turn RDF on Drive the car with RDF to the topmost landing. Position the car so that you can safely access the car roof. Close the MAP. Turn inspection drive on and activate the stop button. Get on the car roof.


86 ( 95 )


3.3.8.1 Step 18

Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Car) Action Reset the Overspeed Governor electrical switch with the reset stick.

Continued

Note The Overspeed Governor reset stick is located on the car roof balustrade:

1078759.wmf

19 20

Exit the car roof. Record the test results.

21

Turn the inspection drive switch to normal position, release the stop button. Open MAP and turn RDF off. Close the MAP. Test that the elevator operates normally.

22 23 24



87 ( 95 )


3.3.8.2

Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Counterweight)

Counterweight Safety Gear and Overspeed Governor is an optional item, mainly used if there is a void below the elevator pit. Step 1 2

3

Action Travel in the car to a floor in mid-travel. Give a car call to one floor down and stop the car with the roof a maximum of 700mm from the landing, so that you can access the car roof. Access the car roof.

Note Stop the car with the landing door emergency release key.

1. Open the landing door. 2. Remain on the landing and verify that the car roof stop switch and inspection drive switch prevent car movement. 3. Push down the stop switch. 4. Check that fall prevention balustrade is installed, or if applicable, raise the balustrade until it is locked. 5. Safely access the car roof. Close the landing doors behind you and check they are mechanically locked.

Risk of falling 4 5 6

Take care when accessing the car roof.

Drive the car with inspection drive so that you are near the bottom of the counterweight. Disconnect the Overspeed Governor rope connection point from the counterweight safety gear levers. Lower the rope connection point to the tension weight pulley. Note


Keep the rope speed low so that the Overspeed Governor electrical switch does not trip.

88 ( 95 )


3.3.8.2 Step 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14

Testing The Overspeed Governor Tripping (Counterweight) Action Drive up with inspection drive so that you can reach the Overspeed Governor electrical switch. Pull the Overspeed Governor rope connection point up. Let the rope connection point accelerate the Overspeed Governor rope speed. Simultaneously measure the tripping speeds of the electrical and mechanical points of the Overspeed Governor using a hand tachometer, Test the Overspeed Governor electrical switch operation by trying to drive down using the inspection drive. Lower the Overspeed Governor rope connection point to the tension weight pulley. Reset the Overspeed Governor electrical switch. Drive the car down with inspection so that you are near the bottom of the counterweight. Pull Overspeed Governor rope connection point up from the tension weight pulley. Note

15 16 17

Note Leave escape space between the car door operator and top of the landing door opening.

Record the measurements.

The car must not move

Keep the rope speed low so that the OSG electrical switch does not trip.

Connect the Overspeed Governor rope connection point to the counterweight safety gear levers. Drive the car with inspection drive so that you can safely exit the car roof Exit the car roof. 1. Slowly open the landing door so that no one steps in from the landing thinking that car has arrived. 2. Check that no one can enter the shaft from the landing. 3. Exit the car roof. 4. Release the car roof stop switch. 5. Close the landing doors and check that they are mechanically locked. Risk of falling

18 19

Continued

Take care when exiting the car roof.

Leave the elevator on normal drive. Record the test results.



89 ( 95 )


3.3.9

Safety Gear Tests

3.3.9.1

Testing The Car Safety Gear

Step 1 2

Caution

The safety gear must be tested with empty car at inspection drive speed.

Warning

Disconnect the landing calls and inhibit door opening. Ensure that no one can enter the elevator shaft or car during the test.

Action Travel in the car to the topmost floor. Switch RDF (270) on (4).

Note

4

3 4

5

Inhibit door opening and landing calls. Using RDF, position the car roof in the middle of the landing door. Check by opening the landing door with the emergency door opening key. Move the plug of the XL8 connector from normal position to test position.

LCEUI switches 263 and 261.

1 1

2 1 1027270.wmf

6 7

Drive down with RDF for approximately 2 seconds and push the overspeed governor test button. Try to drive down with RDF to check that the safety gear is engaged.


1. Normal position 2. Test position The elevator must stop immediately. The elevator car must not move when the safety gear is engaged

90 ( 95 )


3.3.9.1 Step 8


Continued

Action

Note

Access the car roof. 1. Open the landing door. 2. Remain on the landing and verify that the car roof stop switch and inspection drive switch prevent car movement. 3. Push down the stop switch. 4. Check that fall prevention balustrade is installed, or if applicable, raise the balustrade until it is locked. 5. Safely access the car roof. Close the landing doors behind you and check they are mechanically locked.

Risk of falling 9 10


Switch the inspection drive on. Reset the overspeed governor switch using the resetting stick fixed on the car roof balustrade,

1078759.wmf

11

Exit the car roof. 1. Slowly open the landing door so that no one steps in from the landing thinking that car has arrived. 2. Check that no one can enter the shaft from the landing. 3. Exit the car roof. 4. Release the car roof stop switch. 5. Close the landing doors and check that they are mechanically locked. Risk of falling

12


Switch RDF (270) off.


91 ( 95 )


3.3.9.1 Step 13 14 15 16 17 18


Continued

Action Access the car roof as described above. Release the stop button on car roof Try to drive down using inspection drive. Exit the car roof as described above. Switch RDF (270) on. Reset the position of the connector XL8 from the test position between XL8/1 and XL8/2 to the normal position between XL8/2 and XL8/3.

Note

The hoisting machine must not start. This verifies that the safety gear switch operates. Switch inspection drive off from the car roof.

1 1

2 1 1027270.wmf

1. Normal position 2. Test position 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Release the safety gear by driving up using RDF. Drive the car using RDF to a suitable level so that you can access the car roof. Access the car roof as described above. Drive down using inspection drive until you see the safety gear grip marks on the guide rails. Measure the length of the grip marks on both sides and check that they are on the same level Remove the safety gear marks using a file. Drive the car to a suitable level so that you can exit the car roof Exit the car roof. 1. Slowly open the landing door so that no one steps in from the landing thinking that car has arrived. 2. Check that no one can enter the shaft from the landing. 3. Exit the car roof. 4. Release the car roof stop switch. 5. Close the landing doors and check that they are mechanically locked. Risk of falling

27

Removing the marks avoids excessive wear of guide shoes and roller guides.





92 ( 95 )


3.3.9.2

Testing The Counterweight Safety Gear

Counterweight Safety Gear and Overspeed Governor is an optional item, mainly used if there is a void below the elevator pit.

Step 1 2 3 4

Caution

The safety gear must be tested with empty car at inspection drive speed.

Warning

Disconnect the landing calls and inhibit door opening. Ensure that no one can enter the elevator shaft or car during the test.

Action Travel in the car to the topmost floor. Inhibit door opening and landing calls. Give a car call to a floor in mid travel. Switch RDF (270) on (4).

Note LCEUI switches 263 and 261.

4

5 6

7 8 9 10

Remove the car overspeed governor cable from XL8. Connect the counterweight overspeed governor cable to XL8 between pins 1 and 2, the test position. Drive up with RDF for approximately 2 seconds and push the overspeed governor test button. Try to drive up with RDF to check that the safety gear is engaged. Release the safety gear by driving down using RDF. Drive the car up with RDF to suitable level so that you can accress the car roof.


1 1

2 1 1027270.wmf

1. Normal position 2. Test position The elevator must stop immediately. The elevator car must not move when the safety gear is engaged

93 ( 95 )


3.3.9.2 Step 11

Testing The Counterweight Safety Gear Continued Action

Note

Access the car roof. 1. Open the landing door with the emergency release key. 2. Remain on the landing and verify that the car roof stop switch and inspection drive switch prevent car movement. 3. Push down the stop switch. 4. Check that fall prevention balustrade is installed, or if applicable, raise the balustrade until it is locked. 5. Safely access the car roof. Close the landing doors behind you and check they are mechanically locked.

Risk of falling 12 13


Switch the inspection drive on. Reset the overspeed governor switch using the resetting stick fixed on the car roof balustrade,

1078759.wmf

14

Exit the car roof. 1. Slowly open the landing door so that no one steps in from the landing thinking that car has arrived. 2. Check that no one can enter the shaft from the landing. 3. Exit the car roof. 4. Release the car roof stop switch. 5. Close the landing doors and check that they are mechanically locked. Risk of falling



94 ( 95 )


3.3.9.2 Step 15 16

Testing The Counterweight Safety Gear Continued Action Remove the counterweight overspeed governor cable from XL8. Connect the car overspeed governor cable to XL8, its normal position

Note

1 1

2 1 1027270.wmf

1. Normal position 2. Test position 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Switch RDF (270) off. Access the car roof as described above. Drive down using inspection drive until you see the safety gear grip marks on the guide rails. Measure the length of the grip marks on both sides and check that they are on the same level Remove the safety gear marks using a file. Drive the car to a suitable level so that you can exit the car roof Exit the car roof. 1. Slowly open the landing door so that no one steps in from the landing thinking that car has arrived. 2. Check that no one can enter the shaft from the landing. 3. Exit the car roof. 4. Release the car roof stop switch. 5. Close the landing doors and check that they are mechanically locked. Risk of falling

24

Removing the marks avoids excessive wear of guide shoes and roller guides.





95 ( 95 )

Owner’s Documentation Instructions for use

4.2.1.1

Safety

Continued

Note

Notice

Notice

This elevator has Shaft Access Monitoring (SAM) and if you open a landing door to estimate where the car is, SAM prevents the elevator from moving until you reset SAM. For more information on resetting SAM, see Section 3.24 Shaft Access Monitoring (SAM). Taking the elevator out of service The elevator shall be taken out of service if there is a potentially safety critical failure, that cannot be fixed immediately. The elevator can be switched off from the Main switch in Maintenance Access Panel. This action can be taken by specially trained building personnel (if allowed by national legislation) while waiting for competent maintenance person(s). Before switching off the elevator please ensure that there is nobody inside the car. If there are trapped people in the car leave the car lighting and ventilation supply ON for their convenience until they have been rescued. SAFETY NOTICE The maintenance company MUST be informed of any rescue intervention by your authorised person or that of third party personnel. Access to the building for the maintenance company must be provided for the purpose of rescuing persons in all circumstances.

NOTE! Check first whether the car is on the door zone. If it is open the landing door with special triangle slot key and let the passengers come out.

4.2.1.2

Rescue Categories

There are differences in rescue operations according to level of complexity. Rescue operations are divided into three different categories: • Normal rescue - Allowed for trained maintenance personnel of the building or professional elevator personnel. • Technical rescue - Allowed for professional elevator personnel only. • Emergency rescue - Allowed for professional emergency personnel only, rescue in emergency situations.


19 ( 56 )


4.2.1.3

Contacting Qualified Personnel

Contact a trained person or a competent maintenance person at the earliest opportunity. The KONE Call Centre is manned 24 hours a day so someone will always be available to answer an emergency call and to ensure an engineer is alerted if required. The call centre number is in the contacts list (Section 0) at the front of this manual.

Note

• • •

The following persons are ALLOWED to rescue trapped passengers:

Maintenance personnel of the building, if allowed by national legislation, provided that they have received proper training for rescue procedures, and taking into account local regulations Competent elevator maintenance persons with knowledge of general maintenance procedures and the KONE elevator Third party personnel, for example, firemen, provided that they have received proper training for rescue procedures, and taking into account local regulations

4.2.1.4

Reassuring Passengers

Good Communication between the passengers and the rescuers / responsible building personnel is extremely important to reassure the passengers that help is on its way. When direct communication is not possible (for example due to long distances between the machine room and the car) use the Intercom or similar system when provided. Inform the passengers of the following: 1. They are safe and should remain calm. 2. Help is on the way to safely remove them from the elevator car. 3. There will be sufficient oxygen since the car is properly ventilated. 4. Passengers should stay away from the elevator door, so that the doors can be opened safely. ASK the passengers questions – there are two good reasons for doing so. Questions not only provide information to help make decisions about the most appropriate course of action to take, but also a reasonable and concerned voice reassures the passengers that someone has a continuing interest and that something is being done. Questions you can ask: 1. How many passengers are inside the elevator car? 2. What is the physical condition of all the passengers? 3. Are the lights still functioning inside the elevator car? 4. Are any of the call buttons lit? 5. Is there a floor number displayed on the car operating panel position indicator? 6. In which direction was the elevator travelling when it stopped? 7. Which floor did you last leave? 8. Which floor was to be your last stop?


20 ( 56 )


4.2.2

Rescue Method Selection

In order to achieve successful rescue procedures, the rescue situation must firstly be identified. Therefore the rescue procedures are divided according to type of situation and according to elevator type. The primary objective for all rescue operations is to use landings whenever possible. If the use of landings is not possible, other methods shall be considered. In some cases the passengers can be transported from the trapped car to a door zone using an adjacent elevator as rescue elevator. If the elevator car is stuck in a single shaft there is no possibility of using another car in the rescue operation. If the elevator cannot be safely reached, the emergency services must rescue the passengers from the car. Identifying rescue situation The basic guideline for selecting the proper rescue method is the location of the elevator car. When arriving at the site: • Check from position indicators at the main entrance floor where the elevator car is. • Ask the building personnel if they already know where the car is. If car position is still unknown; • Check the position indicator in the machine room or system parameters, if there is no indicator, • KONE E-Link™ can be used to locate the car, if the E-Link system is installed in the building. • From the lowest landing, estimate the car position There are differences in rescue operations according to level of complexity. Rescue operations are divided into three different categories: • Normal rescue (Section 4.2.3) - Passengers can be rescued from the car without moving the car. This method may also be allowed for trained building personnel to perform. • Technical rescue (Section 4.2.4) - Passengers can be rescued from the car after moving it to a door zone. Two rescue persons are needed in a technical rescue operation. This method is only for use by professional elevator engineers. • Emergency rescue (Section 4.2.5) - If the car cannot be moved to a door zone the passengers may be rescued through the car roof. This method will involve special emergency personnel and/or firefighters.


21 ( 56 )


4.2.3

Normal Rescue Method

4.2.3.1

Flow Chart (Normal Rescue) Calm down passengers and inform them what you are going to do. Check location of the car without opening the landing doors.

NORMAL RESCUE

Open the Maintenance Access Panel (MAP)

Does the Door Zone Indicator LED illuminate?

NO

Technical rescue by professional elevator personnel is needed *)

YES Switch the main power off (220). Close the maintenance access panel. Open the doors and assist passengers out. Close and lock the landing door afterwards. *) For more information, see the Technical Rescue Section 4.2.5.


22 ( 56 )

1079077.wmf


4.2.3.2

Rescue Equipment (Normal Rescue)

The Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) is usually located on the topmost or second topmost landing. The MAP can be wall mounted or included in the door frame. The MAP contains the manual operating devices of the elevator. These controls are all that are needed for a normal rescue. Door Zone Indicator (DZI) The DZI (A) must indicate that the elevator car is in a door zone before the car doors are opened. If the indicator is not illuminated, trained elevator personnel must move the car to a door zone using technical rescue procedures. If technical rescue fails, emergency rescue by specially-trained emergency personnel is required.

A

U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR SPEED

RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2

1076079.wmf

Door MAP


23 ( 56 )

1071023.wmf

XL4

Wall MAP

XL5


4.2.3.1


Continued

The main switch switches electrical power to an elevator on or off.

1076080.wmf

Door MAP


Wall MAP

24 ( 56 )


4.2.4

Technical Rescue Methods

4.2.4.1

Flow Chart EMERGENCY RESCUE Check the emergency battery.

Switch off the main switch (220). Move the car with mechanical

b)

brake. YES

Car is near floor level (± 0.5 m)

Is the emergency battery operative?

NO

b)

YES

YES

NO

NO Check the roping. Arrange corrections if needed. Close the landing door.

Does the car move?

Switch off the main switch (220). Move the car with mechanical brake and landing checks.

c)

NO

Do the Speed and Direction LEDs operate?

Move the car using a car lifting tool. (Min. 150 mm up/down) Release the safety gear.

d)

YES Is there power supply for the elevator?

Does the car move?

NO

Does the car move?

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

Move the car by using recall drive feature (RDF).


a)

d)

Does the car move?

Move the car to the nearest door zone. Door zone indicator should illuminate. Switch off the main switch (220).

Open the doors and help the passengers out. YES

If the car cannot be moved, call the emergency services. They can assist passengers out using special equipment considering the situation.

TECHNICAL RESCUE

Open the landing door and check the car position.

NOTE: Tell passengers to pay attention when stepping to the landing if the car sill and the landing sill are not on the same level.

NO Close the landing door afterwards and ensure that it is mechanically locked.

Open the doors and help the passengers out. NOTE: Tell passengers to pay attention when stepping to the landing if the car sill and the landing sill are not on the same level. Close the landing door afterwards and ensure that it is mechanically locked.

a) b) c) d)

1083892.wmf

See Section 4.2.4.3 Moving the elevator car using RDF and Section 4.2.4.4 Car or Counterweight stuck on safety gear. See Section 4.2.4.5 Moving the elevator car with mechanical brake and Section 4.2.4.7 Emergency battery drive EBD M (optional). See Section 4.2.4.6 Moving the elevator car with mechanical brake with manual landing door checks and Section 4.2.4.7 Emergency battery drive EBD M (optional). See Section 4.2.5.8 Moving car with car lifting equipment.


25 ( 56 )


4.2.4.2


The MAP is usually located on the topmost or second topmost landing. The MAP can be wall mounted or included in the door frame. The MAP contains the manual operating devices of the elevator. Door MAP:

1

2

6

5

3 U2

7


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

R145

TP5

C77

8

F2

XL2

XL4

XL5

4

1076083.wmf

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


Manual brake release device Brake release lever. DZI, RDF direction buttons, speed and direction LEDs. Main switch (220 or 220:2). RDF switch (270). RDF run button (270:RB). Shaft light switch (268). SAM reset button (141:P) (optional).

26 ( 56 )


4.2.4.2


Continued

Wall MAP:

1

3

2

U2


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2

8

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5

4 6 5

1076093.wmf

7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


Manual brake release device Brake release lever DZI, RDF direction buttons, speed and direction LEDs Main switch (220 or 220:2) RDF switch (270) RDF run button (270:RB) Shaft light switch (268) SAM reset button (141:P) (optional)

27 ( 56 )


4.2.4.3 Step 1

2 3

Moving The Elevator Car using RDF Action Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to leave it until they are advised that it is safe to do so. Open the Maintenance Access Panel door, on the topmost (or second topmost) landing, with the key. Turn the recall drive switch 270 to the ON position (4).

Illustration / Note

4

4

Switch the shaft lights (268) on.

236

290:1 290:2

268

1

5

If the elevator is equipped with Shaft Access Monitor (SAM) and you have opened a landing door with the emergency opening key, reset the SAM by pushing the RDF Run button 270 RB and the reset button 141:P, in the MAP, simultaneously for at least 5 seconds. The SAM reset signal sounds.

U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR

U7 =0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

7

28 ( 56 )

>0.5m/s

S2

5


SPEED

RDF UP

XL2

2 Door zone indicator LEDs 5 RDF Run button 270 RB 7 Reset button 141:P

2

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5


4.2.4.3 Step 6

Moving The Elevator Car using RDF

continued

Action Push the RDF Run Button 270:RB together with direction button (3) RDF UP or RDF DW simultaneously to drive the car to the nearest floor. Check that the car is moving from the direction and speed indicator (2). The car ios in the door zone when the door zone DZI LEDs (1) illuminate.

Illustration / Note

1 2

3

LWD TP6

XL2

7

TP5

XL4

XL5 P09000382.wmf

Switch off the main switch (220 or 220:2).

0

8

1080923.wmf

Close and lock the Maintenance Access Panel door.

1072612.wmf

Warning


Never leave the Maintenance Access Panel door open or unlocked when it is unattended. This provides access to elevator controls for unauthorised persons and may cause danger.

29 ( 56 )


4.2.4.3 Step 9

Moving The Elevator Car using RDF Action Open the landing/car doors and assist the passengers to leave the car. Warning

10 11

continued Illustration / Note Refer to Section 4.2.6

Ensure the passengers will not stumble if the elevator car is not exactly at sill level..

Close the landing door and ensure that it is mechanically locked. Finalise the rescue operation.

Refer to Section 4.2.8

If the elevator car does not move using methods described in this section, see Section 4.2.4.4 Car Stuck On Safety Gear.


30 ( 56 )


4.2.4.4

Car Or Counterweight Stuck On Safety Gear

Normally the motor power will be enough to lift the elevator car from the safety gear using recall drive (RDF). Step 1

2 3

Action Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to leave it until they are advised that it is safe to do so. Open the Maintenance Access Panel door, on the topmost (or second topmost) landing, with the key. Turn the recall drive switch 270 to the ON position (4).

Illustration / Note

4

4


236

290:1 290:2

268

1

5


U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR

U7 =0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

7

31 ( 56 )

>0.5m/s

S2

5


SPEED

RDF UP

XL2


2

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5


4.2.4.4 Step 6


Continued

Action Push the RDF run button 270 RB together with direction button (3) RDF UP or RDF DW to drive the car to nearest door zone.

Illustration / Note

Check that the car is moving from the direction and speed indicator (2). The car is on the door zone, when any of the DZI LEDs (1) illuminate.

1

NOTE: If the elevator car is stuck on safety gear, push RDF UP and 270RB. If the counterweight is stuck on safety gear, push RDF DW and 270RB.

2

3

LWD TP6

XL2

Use the car lifting tool if the car cannot be moved on RDF because the ropes slip. See Section 4.2.4.8.

TP5

XL4

XL5 P09000382.wmf

Caution

7

If the car does not move and ropes slip on the traction wheel, do not rotate the motor not continually for more than 3 seconds at a time.

Repeat the action a maximum of 5 times with a minimum 5 second pause between attempts. Drive the car using buttons 270:RB and RDF UP or Check from the direction and speed indicator that the car is moving in the correct direction and not RDF DW to the nearest door zone. overspeeding. Stop immediately if the red LED SPEED > 0.6 m/s illuminates. The car is in the door zone when the DZI LED illuminates.

8


0

1080923.wmf


32 ( 56 )


4.2.4.4 Step 9


Continued

Action Close and lock the Maintenance Access Panel door.

Illustration / Note

1072612.wmf

10

Never leave the Maintenance Access Panel door open or unlocked while it Warning is unattended. This provides access to elevator controls for unauthorised persons and thus may cause danger. Open the landing/car doors and assist the Refer to Section 4.2.6 passengers to leave the car. Warning

11 12





33 ( 56 )


4.1.6

If The Elevator Stops Between Floors

In the event of an emergency or if the elevator should stop between floors, due to a power failure for example, please remain calm and follow the instructions below. By following these instructions you will make sure that help will arrive and that you will not unintentionally cause a hazardous situation. IF THE ELEVATOR SHOULD STOP BETWEEN FLOORS 1. Wait a few seconds then press the button for your floor again. 2. If the elevator still fails to respond press the alarm bell, for at least 3 seconds, to indicate that there is a problem. This will initiate an alarm bell in the well and the intercom which will automatically connect to a Call Centre. 3. The elevator is equipped with an intercom which provides you with direct two way voice communication with a Call Centre. Follow the instructions given by them. 4. Stay calm and relax, there is no danger and there is adequate ventilation.

Note

The alarm button is marked with a yellow bell symbol. Danger of severe accident!

Warning


DO NOT try to exit the elevator without the assistance of a trained person. It is very dangerous to attempt to exit the elevator by yourself. Wait for a trained person to arrive on the scene and follow their instructions.

16 ( 56 )


4.2

INSTRUCTIONS FOR RESCUE OPERATIONS

4.2.1

General and Safety Precautions

Although occurrences of malfunctions in KONE elevators are very rare, there are situations where passengers may get trapped in the elevator. Examples are: • If the elevator does not move • If the car lighting has failed • If abnormal noise is heard from the elevator shaft • If the doors do not close • If the elevator has stopped and the doors do not open • If an alarm has been notified and there is somebody in the elevator. Warning

You must not start any rescue operation yourself unless you are trained for this task.

If such an unfortunate situation should arise, follow the instructions given below. Contact a trained person or a competent maintenance person at the earliest time possible. The release of passengers should only be carried out by authorised persons who have received the necessary instructions and training. Failure to take adequate precautions may render the authorised person concerned guilty of negligence should an accident occur. All release operations should be carried out according to the instructions in this section. In some situations, the building rescue plan defines the rescue method.


17 ( 56 )


4.2.1.1

Safety

Only trained and experienced elevator emergency personnel can rescue passengers from elevators. When running a rescue operation on this type of elevator, the following safety rules are mandatory: • When entering the elevator, ensure that others are not already working there. • Do not leave the open landing door unguarded. • Follow local safety regulations and KONE safety rules; no exceptions for unusual situations. • Do not release the mechanical brake when the elevator is in the door zone, indicated by the Door Zone Indicator (DZI) illuminating. • Be careful when releasing the mechanical brake. • Keep in mind that the Door Zone Indicator LEDs and speed and direction LEDs do not operate if the emergency battery is discharged and the normal power supply is unavailable. • Do not move the car without direct supervision if passengers may be able to open the car doors. • If the landing door has to be opened manually, use only a specially designed triangle key.

Notice

Any person authorised by the owner of the installation to rescue trapped passengers must be trained by the maintenance organisation, or competent third party, in conformity with the instructions provided in this manual. The training must be appropriate to the specific installation and updated. The authorised person must be informed about the situations for which only the maintenance organisation shall carry out a rescue operation.

Warning

The person authorised by the owner of the installation to rescue trapped passengers may only rescue people through the landing doors.

Notice

If the authorised person is unable to move the lift car through the use of the manual and/or electric emergency devises, the maintenance company must be called.

Warning

A trained person is ONLY allowed to move the elevator car IF it is stuck between floors AND the car and landing doors are closed.

Warning

Warning

Warning


ENSURE THAT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONDUCTORS ARE SAFELY DEENERGISED BEFORE WORKING ON THEM. Do not connect or disconnect any connectors when the power is ON. Follow the safe working methods defined herein. If you are uncertain of the method’s safety, seek expert advice. Do not skip any step within the subprocedures, otherwise there may be a potentially dangerous situation which you have not considered. Ensure that your work does not cause a hazard to others and, In particular, keep access ways and fire exits clear. Personal safety equipment must be available and used as required. If there is risk of injury from a fall, a fall protection system must be used. If you have attached the harness to a guide rail bracket or other fixed point in the lift shaft, you must ensure that there can be no unwanted movement of the car or counterweight.

18 ( 56 )


4.2.1.1

Safety

Continued

Note

Notice

Notice

This elevator has Shaft Access Monitoring (SAM) and if you open a landing door to estimate where the car is, SAM prevents the elevator from moving until you reset SAM. For more information on resetting SAM, see Section 3.24 Shaft Access Monitoring (SAM). Taking the elevator out of service The elevator shall be taken out of service if there is a potentially safety critical failure, that cannot be fixed immediately. The elevator can be switched off from the Main switch in Maintenance Access Panel. This action can be taken by specially trained building personnel (if allowed by national legislation) while waiting for competent maintenance person(s). Before switching off the elevator please ensure that there is nobody inside the car. If there are trapped people in the car leave the car lighting and ventilation supply ON for their convenience until they have been rescued. SAFETY NOTICE The maintenance company MUST be informed of any rescue intervention by your authorised person or that of third party personnel. Access to the building for the maintenance company must be provided for the purpose of rescuing persons in all circumstances.

NOTE! Check first whether the car is on the door zone. If it is open the landing door with special triangle slot key and let the passengers come out.

4.2.1.2

Rescue Categories

There are differences in rescue operations according to level of complexity. Rescue operations are divided into three different categories: • Normal rescue - Allowed for trained maintenance personnel of the building or professional elevator personnel. • Technical rescue - Allowed for professional elevator personnel only. • Emergency rescue - Allowed for professional emergency personnel only, rescue in emergency situations.


19 ( 56 )


4.2.1.3

Contacting Qualified Personnel

Contact a trained person or a competent maintenance person at the earliest opportunity. The KONE Call Centre is manned 24 hours a day so someone will always be available to answer an emergency call and to ensure an engineer is alerted if required. The call centre number is in the contacts list (Section 0) at the front of this manual.

Note

• • •

The following persons are ALLOWED to rescue trapped passengers:

Maintenance personnel of the building, if allowed by national legislation, provided that they have received proper training for rescue procedures, and taking into account local regulations Competent elevator maintenance persons with knowledge of general maintenance procedures and the KONE elevator Third party personnel, for example, firemen, provided that they have received proper training for rescue procedures, and taking into account local regulations

4.2.1.4

Reassuring Passengers

Good Communication between the passengers and the rescuers / responsible building personnel is extremely important to reassure the passengers that help is on its way. When direct communication is not possible (for example due to long distances between the machine room and the car) use the Intercom or similar system when provided. Inform the passengers of the following: 1. They are safe and should remain calm. 2. Help is on the way to safely remove them from the elevator car. 3. There will be sufficient oxygen since the car is properly ventilated. 4. Passengers should stay away from the elevator door, so that the doors can be opened safely. ASK the passengers questions – there are two good reasons for doing so. Questions not only provide information to help make decisions about the most appropriate course of action to take, but also a reasonable and concerned voice reassures the passengers that someone has a continuing interest and that something is being done. Questions you can ask: 1. How many passengers are inside the elevator car? 2. What is the physical condition of all the passengers? 3. Are the lights still functioning inside the elevator car? 4. Are any of the call buttons lit? 5. Is there a floor number displayed on the car operating panel position indicator? 6. In which direction was the elevator travelling when it stopped? 7. Which floor did you last leave? 8. Which floor was to be your last stop?


20 ( 56 )


4.2.2

Rescue Method Selection

In order to achieve successful rescue procedures, the rescue situation must firstly be identified. Therefore the rescue procedures are divided according to type of situation and according to elevator type. The primary objective for all rescue operations is to use landings whenever possible. If the use of landings is not possible, other methods shall be considered. In some cases the passengers can be transported from the trapped car to a door zone using an adjacent elevator as rescue elevator. If the elevator car is stuck in a single shaft there is no possibility of using another car in the rescue operation. If the elevator cannot be safely reached, the emergency services must rescue the passengers from the car. Identifying rescue situation The basic guideline for selecting the proper rescue method is the location of the elevator car. When arriving at the site: • Check from position indicators at the main entrance floor where the elevator car is. • Ask the building personnel if they already know where the car is. If car position is still unknown; • Check the position indicator in the machine room or system parameters, if there is no indicator, • KONE E-Link™ can be used to locate the car, if the E-Link system is installed in the building. • From the lowest landing, estimate the car position There are differences in rescue operations according to level of complexity. Rescue operations are divided into three different categories: • Normal rescue (Section 4.2.3) - Passengers can be rescued from the car without moving the car. This method may also be allowed for trained building personnel to perform. • Technical rescue (Section 4.2.4) - Passengers can be rescued from the car after moving it to a door zone. Two rescue persons are needed in a technical rescue operation. This method is only for use by professional elevator engineers. • Emergency rescue (Section 4.2.5) - If the car cannot be moved to a door zone the passengers may be rescued through the car roof. This method will involve special emergency personnel and/or firefighters.


21 ( 56 )


4.2.3

Normal Rescue Method

4.2.3.1

Flow Chart (Normal Rescue) Calm down passengers and inform them what you are going to do. Check location of the car without opening the landing doors.

NORMAL RESCUE

Open the Maintenance Access Panel (MAP)

Does the Door Zone Indicator LED illuminate?

NO

Technical rescue by professional elevator personnel is needed *)

YES Switch the main power off (220). Close the maintenance access panel. Open the doors and assist passengers out. Close and lock the landing door afterwards. *) For more information, see the Technical Rescue Section 4.2.5.


22 ( 56 )

1079077.wmf


4.2.3.2


The Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) is usually located on the topmost or second topmost landing. The MAP can be wall mounted or included in the door frame. The MAP contains the manual operating devices of the elevator. These controls are all that are needed for a normal rescue. Door Zone Indicator (DZI) The DZI (A) must indicate that the elevator car is in a door zone before the car doors are opened. If the indicator is not illuminated, trained elevator personnel must move the car to a door zone using technical rescue procedures. If technical rescue fails, emergency rescue by specially-trained emergency personnel is required.

A

U2


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2

1076079.wmf

Door MAP


23 ( 56 )

1071023.wmf

XL4

Wall MAP

XL5


4.2.3.1


Continued

The main switch switches electrical power to an elevator on or off.

1076080.wmf

Door MAP


Wall MAP

24 ( 56 )


4.2.4

Technical Rescue Methods

4.2.4.1

Flow Chart EMERGENCY RESCUE Check the emergency battery.

Switch off the main switch (220). Move the car with mechanical

b)

brake. YES

Car is near floor level (± 0.5 m)

Is the emergency battery operative?

NO

b)

YES

YES

NO

NO Check the roping. Arrange corrections if needed. Close the landing door.

Does the car move?

Switch off the main switch (220). Move the car with mechanical brake and landing checks.

c)

NO

Do the Speed and Direction LEDs operate?


d)

YES Is there power supply for the elevator?

Does the car move?

NO

Does the car move?

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

Move the car by using recall drive feature (RDF).


a)

d)

Does the car move?

Move the car to the nearest door zone. Door zone indicator should illuminate. Switch off the main switch (220).

Open the doors and help the passengers out. YES

If the car cannot be moved, call the emergency services. They can assist passengers out using special equipment considering the situation.

TECHNICAL RESCUE

Open the landing door and check the car position.

NOTE: Tell passengers to pay attention when stepping to the landing if the car sill and the landing sill are not on the same level.

NO Close the landing door afterwards and ensure that it is mechanically locked.

Open the doors and help the passengers out. NOTE: Tell passengers to pay attention when stepping to the landing if the car sill and the landing sill are not on the same level. Close the landing door afterwards and ensure that it is mechanically locked.

a) b) c) d)

1083892.wmf

See Section 4.2.4.3 Moving the elevator car using RDF and Section 4.2.4.4 Car or Counterweight stuck on safety gear. See Section 4.2.4.5 Moving the elevator car with mechanical brake and Section 4.2.4.7 Emergency battery drive EBD M (optional). See Section 4.2.4.6 Moving the elevator car with mechanical brake with manual landing door checks and Section 4.2.4.7 Emergency battery drive EBD M (optional). See Section 4.2.5.8 Moving car with car lifting equipment.


25 ( 56 )


4.2.4.2


The MAP is usually located on the topmost or second topmost landing. The MAP can be wall mounted or included in the door frame. The MAP contains the manual operating devices of the elevator. Door MAP:

1

2

6

5

3 U2

7


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

R145

TP5

C77

8

F2

XL2

XL4

XL5

4

1076083.wmf

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


Manual brake release device Brake release lever. DZI, RDF direction buttons, speed and direction LEDs. Main switch (220 or 220:2). RDF switch (270). RDF run button (270:RB). Shaft light switch (268). SAM reset button (141:P) (optional).

26 ( 56 )


4.2.4.2


Continued

Wall MAP:

1

3

2

U2


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2

8

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5

4 6 5

1076093.wmf

7 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.


Manual brake release device Brake release lever DZI, RDF direction buttons, speed and direction LEDs Main switch (220 or 220:2) RDF switch (270) RDF run button (270:RB) Shaft light switch (268) SAM reset button (141:P) (optional)

27 ( 56 )


4.2.4.3 Step 1

2 3

Moving The Elevator Car using RDF Action Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to leave it until they are advised that it is safe to do so. Open the Maintenance Access Panel door, on the topmost (or second topmost) landing, with the key. Turn the recall drive switch 270 to the ON position (4).

Illustration / Note

4

4


236

290:1 290:2

268

1

5


U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR

U7 =0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

7

28 ( 56 )

>0.5m/s

S2

5


SPEED

RDF UP

XL2


2

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5


4.2.4.3 Step 6

Moving The Elevator Car using RDF

continued

Action Push the RDF Run Button 270:RB together with direction button (3) RDF UP or RDF DW simultaneously to drive the car to the nearest floor. Check that the car is moving from the direction and speed indicator (2). The car ios in the door zone when the door zone DZI LEDs (1) illuminate.

Illustration / Note

1 2

3

LWD TP6

XL2

7

TP5

XL4

XL5 P09000382.wmf


0

8

1080923.wmf

Close and lock the Maintenance Access Panel door.

1072612.wmf

Warning


Never leave the Maintenance Access Panel door open or unlocked when it is unattended. This provides access to elevator controls for unauthorised persons and may cause danger.

29 ( 56 )


4.2.4.3 Step 9

Moving The Elevator Car using RDF Action Open the landing/car doors and assist the passengers to leave the car. Warning

10 11

continued Illustration / Note Refer to Section 4.2.6




If the elevator car does not move using methods described in this section, see Section 4.2.4.4 Car Stuck On Safety Gear.


30 ( 56 )


4.2.4.4


Normally the motor power will be enough to lift the elevator car from the safety gear using recall drive (RDF). Step 1

2 3

Action Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to leave it until they are advised that it is safe to do so. Open the Maintenance Access Panel door, on the topmost (or second topmost) landing, with the key. Turn the recall drive switch 270 to the ON position (4).

Illustration / Note

4

4


236

290:1 290:2

268

1

5


U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR

U7 =0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

7

31 ( 56 )

>0.5m/s

S2

5


SPEED

RDF UP

XL2


2

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5


4.2.4.4 Step 6


Continued

Action Push the RDF run button 270 RB together with direction button (3) RDF UP or RDF DW to drive the car to nearest door zone.

Illustration / Note

Check that the car is moving from the direction and speed indicator (2). The car is on the door zone, when any of the DZI LEDs (1) illuminate.

1

NOTE: If the elevator car is stuck on safety gear, push RDF UP and 270RB. If the counterweight is stuck on safety gear, push RDF DW and 270RB.

2

3

LWD TP6

XL2

Use the car lifting tool if the car cannot be moved on RDF because the ropes slip. See Section 4.2.4.8.

TP5

XL4

XL5 P09000382.wmf

Caution

7

If the car does not move and ropes slip on the traction wheel, do not rotate the motor not continually for more than 3 seconds at a time.

Repeat the action a maximum of 5 times with a minimum 5 second pause between attempts. Drive the car using buttons 270:RB and RDF UP or Check from the direction and speed indicator that the car is moving in the correct direction and not RDF DW to the nearest door zone. overspeeding. Stop immediately if the red LED SPEED > 0.6 m/s illuminates. The car is in the door zone when the DZI LED illuminates.

8


0

1080923.wmf


32 ( 56 )


4.2.4.4 Step 9


Continued

Action Close and lock the Maintenance Access Panel door.

Illustration / Note

1072612.wmf

10


11 12





33 ( 56 )


4.2.4.5 Step

1

2

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device Action

Illustration / Note NEVER open the brake if the car is already on the door zone! This may Warning cause a serious hazard if someone tries to enter or exit the car simultaneously as it is moving. Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to leave it until they are advised that it is safe to do so. Ask the passengers if the car light or car If the normal power supply to the elevator car emergency lighting is on. lighting is unavailable, but the car emergency light is on, the emergency lighting battery is operative. It also supplies power to the door zone LEDs and speed and direction LEDs in the LCE user interface. Battery status can also be checked by pushing the alarm button in car operating panel: If the alarm buzzer sounds or a call to the service centre is successful, the battery operates.

3

Check that all the landing doors are closed and mechanically locked. NOTE! If you are not absolutely sure that the doors are closed, do NOT proceed.

1083989.wmf

4

Open the door of the Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) on the topmost (or second topmost) floor.

5

Switch the main switch (220 or 220:2) OFF.

1083963.wmf

0

1080923.wmf


34 ( 56 )


4.2.4.5 Step 6

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device Action Switch ON the shaft lights (268).

Continued

Illustration / Note

236

290:1 290:2

268

1

7

Check the elevator car position.

A

U2


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2

Warning

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5

Never open the brake when the Door Zone Indicator (DZI) LEDs illuminate.

If the emergency battery is inoperative, you cannot monitor elevator car position or movement from the LCE user interface LEDs. Go to Section 4.2.4.6. Insert the lever in the brake release device. Warning

8

Pull the brake release lever to release the mechanical brake. Keep the brakes open for a maximum of 1 second and then release the lever to close the brakes. Observe, from the speed and direction indicator LEDs, that the car starts to move. The speed can increase very quickly when you open the brake. When the traction sheave starts to move, stop it by letting the brakes close Warning every 0.5 - 1.0 second to prevent the elevator from accelerating to overspeed.


35 ( 56 )


4.2.4.5

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device

Step

Action Warning

Illustration / Note The speed can increase very quickly when you open the brake. When the traction sheave starts to move, stop it by letting the brakes close every 0.5 - 1.0 second to prevent the elevator from accelerating to overspeed. Release the brake lever immediately if: • The red overspeed LEDs in the UP or DOWN direction starts to illuminate, D64 or D67 depending on the direction. • The DZI LEDslit

A

U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR

Note

SPEED

RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2


Continued

36 ( 56 )

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5


4.2.4.5 Step 9

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device Action Check the elevator car position. Select one of the following:

Continued

Illustration / Note

A If speed and direction LEDs indicated that the elevator moved when the brakes were opened, continue to the next step. B If speed and direction LEDs did not turn on, check the elevator car position visually: 1. Check that safety fences are installed where needed. 2. Open the landing doors with emergency opening key, maximum. opening width 100 mm. 3. Check the elevator car position. (x) 4. Close the landing doors. 5. Check that the landing doors are mechanically locked.

x

If the elevator car has moved, the speed and direction LEDs are for some reason inoperative. Go to Section 4.2.4.6 Moving the elevator car using the manual brake releasing device with manual landing door checks.

10

If the elevator car has not moved, select one of the following: A Ask the passengers to change their positions in the car and maybe also to jump. Then repeat step 9. B If the elevator is provided with EBD-M, Refer to Section 4.2.4.7. C Use the car lifting equipment, refer to Section 4.2.4.8. Repeat steps 9 – 10 until the elevator car arrives in the door zone. The car is on the door zone, when the Door zone indicator LEDs (A) illuminate.

1083985.wmf

A

U2


RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2


37 ( 56 )

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5


4.2.4.5 Step 11 12

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device Action Remove the brake release lever and store it inside the MAP. Close the MAP.

Continued

Illustration / Note

1072612.wmf

Never leave the Maintenance Access Panel door open or unlocked while it is unattended. This provides access to elevator controls for unauthorised persons and thus may cause danger. Open the landing/car doors and assist the Refer to Section 4.2.6 passengers to leave the car. Warning

13

Warning 14 15




If the elevator car does not move using the methods described in this section, refer to Section 4.2.4.7 Emergency battery drive EBD M, if the elevator is equipped with the EBD M option.


38 ( 56 )


4.2.4.6

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device With Car Position Checks At Landings

This section describes moving the elevator car to a door zone using the manual brake releasing device when the speed and direction LEDs and door zone LEDs do not operate. It is a remote situation but can occur if for example the emergency lighting battery has run out. Step

1

2

Action

Illustration / Note Manual brake release must be used with extreme care and after each short brake opening sequence the position of the elevator car must be Warning checked with a direct visual check. Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to leave it until they are advised that it is safe to do so. Check that all the landing doors are closed and mechanically locked. NOTE! If you are not absolutely sure that the doors are closed, do NOT proceed.

1083989.wmf

4

Open the door of the Maintenance Access Panel (MAP) on the topmost (or second topmost) floor.

5

Switch the main switch (220 or 220:2) OFF.

1083963.wmf

0

1080923.wmf


39 ( 56 )


4.2.4.6

Step 6

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device With Manual Landing Door Checks Continued Action Switch ON the shaft lights (268).

Illustration / Note

236

290:1 290:2

268

1

7

Check the elevator car position: 1. Check that safety fences are installed where needed. 2. Open the landing doors with emergency opening key, max. opening width 100 mm. 3. Check the elevator car position. (x) 4. Close the landing doors. 5. Check that the landing doors are mechanically locked.

x

1083983.wmf

8

Insert the lever in the brake release device. Pull the brake release lever to release the mechanical brake. Keep the brakes open for a maximum of 1 second and then release the lever to close the brakes. Observe, from the speed and direction indicator LEDs, that the car starts to move. The speed can increase very quickly when you open the brake. When the traction sheave starts to move, stop it by letting the brakes close Warning every 0.5 - 1.0 second to prevent the elevator from accelerating to overspeed.


40 ( 56 )


4.2.4.6

Step 9

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device With Manual Landing Door Checks Continued Action Check the elevator car position.

Illustration / Note

1. Check that safety fences are installed where needed. 2. Open the landing doors with emergency opening key, maximum. opening width 100 mm. 3. Check the elevator car position. (x) 4. Close the landing doors. 5. Check that the landing doors are mechanically locked. NOTE: If the car does not move when releasing the mechanical brakes, there may be a balanced load in the car. If the elevator car has not moved, select one of the following: A Ask the passengers to change their positions in the car and maybe also to jump. Then repeat step 9. B If the elevator is provided with EBD-M, Refer to Section 4.2.4.7. C Use the car lifting equipment, refer to Section 4.2.4.8. Warning 10 11

1083985.wmf


Repeat steps 8 – 9 until the elevator car arrives in the door zone. Remove the brake release lever and store it inside the MAP.


x

41 ( 56 )


4.2.4.6

Step 12

Moving The Elevator Car Using The Mechanical Brake Releasing Device With Manual Landing Door Checks Continued Action

Illustration / Note

Close the MAP.

1072612.wmf

13


14 15





42 ( 56 )


4.2.4.7

Emergency Battery Drive EBD M (optional)

Some MonoSpace® elevators are equipped with Emergency Battery Drive (EBD M). It will have been an option when the elevator was installed.

Note

Warning

Step 1 2

The emergency lighting battery is not the power source for EBD-M. EBD-M can be used even if the emergency lighting battery is inoperative and the door zone and speed LEDs are inoperative. The EBD-M can be used only when there is balanced load in the car. The brake must be open when EBD-M is used. Close the brake immediately after the EBD-M drive.

Action Check that the main switch (220 or 220:2) is off Pull the brake release lever to open the mechanical brake. Observe, from the speed and direction indicator LEDs, that the car is not moving. Warning

3

Illustration / Note Inform the passengers that you are about to move the car in order to let them out and that they should not attempt to open the car doors.

Never open the brake when the Door Zone Indicator (DZI) LEDs illuminate.

Use the manual brake release lever as described in Section 4.2.4.5 or 4.2.4.6. At the same time push button S1 (Down) or S2 (Up) on the EBD remote control board. The brake must be open when EBD-M is used. Close the brake immediately after the EBD-M drive. S1

S2

1076099.wmf


43 ( 56 )


4.2.4.7 Step 4

5

Emergency Battery Drive EBD M (optional)

Continued

Action Observe from the speed and direction indicator LEDs that the car is moving in the correct direction.

Illustration / Note

A

U2

DOOR ZONE INDICATOR

Release the lever and let the mechanical brake close when the green DZI starts to illuminate.

SPEED

RDF UP

>0.5m/s

U7 S2

=0m/s

RDF DW

>0.5m/s

S1

OFFSET

TP4 TP3

LWD

GAIN

R127 TP6

SPEED MEANSUREMENTS

R145

TP5

C77

F2

XL2

6 7

1071023.wmf

XL4

XL5

The speed can increase very quickly when you open the brake. When the traction sheave starts to move, stop it by letting the brakes close Warning every 0.5 - 1.0 second to prevent the elevator from accelerating to overspeed. Release the brake lever immediately if: • The red overspeed LEDs in the UP or DOWN direction starts to Note illuminate, D64 or D67 depending on the direction. • The DZI LEDslit Remove the brake release lever and store it inside the MAP. Close the MAP.

1072612.wmf

Never leave the Maintenance Access Panel door open or unlocked while it is unattended. This provides access to elevator controls for unauthorised persons and thus may cause danger. Open the landing/car doors and assist the Refer to Section 4.2.6 passengers to leave the car. Warning

8

Warning 9 10





44 ( 56 )


4.2.4.8

Moving The Car With Car Lifting Equipment

When the elevator is stuck and cannot be moved by other methods, use the car lifting equipment. The following table describes the car lifting equipment. Step 1 2

3

Description Guide rail clamp Used for fixing the lifting device to the guide rail. Lifting device Standard chain hoist block.

Illustration

2 1

Rope clamp Used for fixing the lifting device to the suspension ropes.

3

1070881.wmf

Equipment Rope clamp Rope clamp Guide rail clamp Guide rail clamp Guide rail clamp Chain hoist block

Warning


Version (A) 2000-11-14 (-) 2000-11-07 (B) 2000-12-15 (A) 2000-11-16 (A) 2000-11-16 Capacity of 2000 kg or 4000 kg

Wear protective cut-resistant safety gloves

45 ( 56 )

Type 6 x 8mm diameter 6 x 13mm diameter T70, T82, T89 T89, T125, T127-2 T140-1 Depends on the hoisting machine type and total mass of the elevator car, including rated load.


4.2.4.8 Step 1

2

Moving The Car With Car Lifting Equipment

Continued

Action Inform the passengers that you are about to let them out and they must not try to do anything by themselves.

Illustration / Note

Turn OFF the main switch 220 or 220:2. Lock and tag the main switch if applicable (220 or 220:2).

0

3

1080923.wmf

Switch ON the shaft lights (268).

236

290:1 290:2

268

1

4

Close the MAP.

1072612.wmf

5

Go to elevator car roof.


46 ( 56 )


4.2.4.8 Step 6A

Moving The Car With Car Lifting Equipment Action Move the car up as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

6B

Connect the guide rail bracket to the car guide rail on the machinery side of the shaft. Connect the rope clamp to the ropes, between the traction sheave and car. Attach the chain hoist block, between the lifting bracket and rope clamp. Move the car by operating the chain hoist upwards.

Continued Illustration / Note NOTE! Always use car guide rail for attachment point, never a single guide rail bracket.

Move the car down as follows: 1. Connect the guide rail bracket to the car guide rail on the machinery side of the shaft. 2. Connect the rope clamp to the ropes, between the traction sheave and counterweight. 3. Attach the chain hoist block, between the lifting bracket and rope clamp. 4. Move the car by operating the chain hoist downwards.

7 8 9

Release the safety gear. Go to the landing. Continue using the procedures in Sections 4.2.4.3 and 4.2.4.5.

10

Open the landing/car doors and assist the passengers to leave the car.

Warning 11 12

If the car is near the door zone or cannot be moved by another method use lifting tool until the car is on the door zone. Refer to Section 4.2.6

Ensure the passengers will not stumble if the elevator car is not exactly at sill level.



P17000032.wmf


47 ( 56 )


4.2.5

Emergency Rescue Through The Elevator Car Roof

The following sections describe the relevant information for an emergency rescue through the elevator car roof.

4.2.5.1

Definition

Emergency rescue is required when the elevator car is trapped between landings and it cannot be moved to a door zone, when technical rescue is not successful. Passengers must be rescued through the trap door in the car roof. From the car roof passengers must climb to the closest emergency door or landing door above, using either a special ladder provided by emergency services or a ladder fixed to the shaft wall.

Warning

This kind of rescue operation must always be planned, led and performed by emergency services personnel trained and authorised for these tasks. It is possible that passengers are too frail, injured or disabled (for example blind), and cannot climb the ladders. Such passengers require specialised equipment provided by emergency rescue organisations, and the use of this equipment is outside the scope of these instructions.

As a minimum, the following trained rescue persons are required for this kind of rescue operation: • One inside the car • One climbing between the car roof and emergency door to assist the passengers • One at the emergency door

Note

The site-specific rescue plan must define the exact number of rescue persons needed.

KONE-specified rescue devices will be stored in a predefined storage place. Emergency services will provide fall protection equipment

4.2.5.2

Authorisation

Persons authorised to perform an emergency rescue through the elevator car roof must be specially trained emergency rescue personnel.


48 ( 56 )


4.2.5.3

Securing the trapped elevator car

The following table describes the actions you must take to secure the trapped elevator car. Step 1

Action Switch off the main power (220 or 220:2) from the trapped elevator. Lock and tag. If the elevator is part of a group, be careful to use the switch marked with the same number as the elevator.

2

Illustration / Note

0

1080923.wmf

Switch on the shaft lighting (268).

236

290:1 290:2

268

1

3

4

Place warning signs near the manual brake opening device in the maintenance access panel to inform others that the brakes must not be operated. Close the Maintenance Access Panel.

1072612.wmf


49 ( 56 )


4.2.5.4

Using Rescue Doors In The Shaft / Ladder In The Car

For information, see the site specific rescue plan.

Note

4.2.5.5 Step 1

2 3 4

Site-specific rescue plans are the responsibility of the building owner / occupier, not KONE.

To Access The Car Roof Action Attach life lines to a suitable point above the door.

Lower the rescue equipment onto the roof of the trapped car. Climb down to the car roof. Open the trap door and release the fixings of the inner ceiling. The fixings are red eye bolts on the car roof. Lower the ceiling carefully down.

Use fall protection.

Tell the passengers in the elevator car to stay away from the area where the ceiling is being lowered.

Warning

4.2.5.6

Illustration / Note One life line for passengers and one for each rescue person who will enter the shaft. Passengers and rescue personnel must use personal fall protection equipment for as long as a fall hazard exists. For example, safety harnesses.

Opening The Elevator Car Roof Trap Door

Step

Action Warning

Illustration / Note Wear protective cut-resistant safety gloves.

1

Open the trap door.

2

Open the elevator car ceiling, if necessary.

1077333.wmf


Some elevator cars have one integrated ceiling

50 ( 56 )


4.2.5.7

Opening The Elevator Car Ceiling

Step

Action Warning

1

Illustration / Note Tell the passengers in the elevator car to stay away from the area where the ceiling is being lowered.

Release the ceiling locks as follows: 1. Remove the cotter pin. 2. Pull the rings up. 3. Release the rings.

1077349.wmf

Note 2

This will release the ceiling locks, but they are not yet open.

Open the ceiling locks as follows: 1 Remove the cotter pin. 2. Pull the safety wire to lift the ceiling upwards. Hold on to the safety wire.

1077353.wmf

Warning


The ceiling locks are now open, do not let the ceiling drop.

51 ( 56 )


4.2.5.7 Step 3

Opening The Elevator Car Ceiling

Continued

Action Carefully lower the ceiling down.

Illustration / Note

1077354.wmf


52 ( 56 )


4.2.6

Rescue Procedures When The Car Is In A Door Zone

You can manually open elevator landing and car doors, if required, during maintenance or in a rescue situation. The landing door is opened with a special triangle slot key. First, check whether the car is near the door zone. If it is, proceed as follows: Step 1

2

Action Inform the passengers about how to act when you open the doors: • They must stay calm. • They must obey the instructions you give. • They must to move away from the car door when the door will be opened. • They must to exit the car one by one Open the landing door with emergency opening key.

Illustration / Note

1081441.wmf

Warning


Wear protective cut-resistant safety gloves

53 ( 56 )


4.2.6 Step 3

Rescue Procedures When The Car Is In A Door Zone Action If the car door does not open when opening the landing door, the car door can be opened by pulling the wire rope and manually push/pull car door.

Continued Illustration / Note

1083988.wmf

Assist the passengers out from the car.

1083987.wmf

Warning Close the landing mechanically locked.

door

Ensure the passengers will not stumble if the elevator car is not exactly at sill level. and

ensure

it

is

1083989.wmf


54 ( 56 )


4.2.7

Resetting The Alarm

You must reset the alarm after a rescue operation if the elevator has an alarm delay feature or remote monitoring system. Step 1

Action Locate the LCERAL board inside the MAP. Wall MAP

Illustration / Note Door MAP

1076098.wmf

1076097.wmf

2 3

Push the RESET button (A) in the LCERAL board to reset the alarm. Check that the alarm LED (B) turns off.

A B

1070930.wmf


55 ( 56 )


4.2.8

After The Rescue

This section describes the actions you must take to determine and clear the cause of the incident which necessitated the rescue operation. Step 1 2

Action Ask the passengers what happened. Clear the possible causes of the fault situation.

3

Check if the trapped elevator can be returned to normal service.

Illustration / Note Write down the name of each rescued passenger. Start corrective maintenance actions for the elevator. Ensure the safety of the elevator before taking it into normal use after a rescue operation or safety check. Ensuring the safety of the elevator requires a visual and functionality check for the elevator.

4 5

Return the rescue equipment to the storage location. Note the fault situation in the elevator’s log book.


56 ( 56 )

Owner’s Documentation Additional Information

5. 5.1

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Communication System Manual


1(2)

2

Owner’s Documentation Additional Information

5.1

Communication System Manual


2(2)

Owner’s Manual

Owner’s Manual

Copyright © 2004 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved under International Copyright Conventions. No part of the contents of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or translated into another language or format, in whole or part, without written consent of KONE Corporation.

OM-13.25.001

Copyright © 2004 KONE Corporation. All rights reserved.

2

Owner’s Manual

Table of contents

1.

INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................... 4

2.

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT ........................................................................................................ 4

3.

RESPONSIBILITIES .................................................................................................................... 5 3.1. 3.2. 3.3.

4.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW.................................................................................................................. 6 4.1.

5.

YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES............................................................................................................ 5 RESCUE SERVICE RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................... 5 RESCUE PERSONNEL RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................................... 5 MAIN COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................. 6

USING THE KRM EMERGENCY PHONE .............................................................................. 7 5.1. 5.2.

NORMAL OPERATION IN A RESCUE SITUATION ........................................................................... 7 CHANGING PARAMETER VALUES (PSTN AND GSM)................................................................. 8

6.

GLOSSARY.................................................................................................................................. 11

7.

APPENDIX ................................................................................................................................... 12 VOICE ALARM CALL TO NORMAL PHONE ............................................................................................. 14 VOICE CALL TO KRM EMERGENCY PHONE (PSTN)............................................................................ 14 VOICE CALL TO KRM EMERGENCY PHONE (GSM)............................................................................. 15 CONFIGURATION CALL TO KRM EMERGENCY PHONE (PSTN) ........................................................... 15

OM-13.25.001


3

Owner’s Manual

1. INTRODUCTION KONE Remote Monitoring (KRM) is an elevator and escalator monitoring system, which is used worldwide to connect site devices to KONE Customer Care Center. This enables two kinds of KONE Remote Monitoring Services: Voice Alarm Service and Safety and Performance Monitoring. These services aim at improved passenger safety and better service level and quality by monitoring continuously the operation of the elevators and escalators. Your elevator is equipped with a KRM Emergency Phone. The KRM Emergency Phone is an item of safety equipment that provides a two-way voice connection between the elevator car and KONE Customer Care Center or some other rescue service.

2. ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT This document tells you how to use and configure the KRM Emergency Phone. Once the system has been installed and taken into use, you do not have to make any adjustments. However, if there is a need to change the settings and you have the KONE Service Contract, KONE Customer Care Center takes care of system configuration.

Take good care of this document! If you do not have a service contract with KONE, you will need this document to be able to change the KRM Emergency Phone settings by yourself.

OM-13.25.001


4

Owner’s Manual

3. RESPONSIBILITIES Because the KRM Emergency Phone is a safety device, it must operate in all situations. The responsibilities between you, the rescue service and the rescue personnel must be clearly defined. 3.1. Your responsibilities •

Ensure that the elevator is constantly connected to a competent rescue service that is able to take care of alarms and passenger entrapments.

•

Inform the rescue service about automatic testing: The KRM system regularly tests the battery capacity of the Emergency Phone. When the battery capacity is too low, the system makes an automatic call to the rescue service.

•

Inform the rescue service about test calls: The KRM system regularly makes automatic test calls to the rescue service to test the operation of the system and the telephone connection. The test call period can be adjusted.

3.2. Rescue service responsibilities The rescue service must have the equipment and organisational capabilities to be able to: • • •

Receive alarms and two-way voice connection from the elevator, at all times Converse with trapped passengers and inform them about the status of the rescue operation Take care of trapped passengers

These capabilities must always be available when the elevator is in use. 3.3. Rescue personnel responsibilities Rescue personnel must have been trained and authorised to rescue trapped passengers. Only the following persons are allowed to rescue trapped passengers: • • •

Elevator service technicians with knowledge of maintenance procedures Maintenance personnel of the building, provided that they have received proper training for rescue procedures Third party personnel, such as firemen, who have been trained in safe rescue procedures

In all rescue cases, the local regulations must be taken into account.

OM-13.25.001


5

Owner’s Manual

4. SYSTEM OVERVIEW

4.1. Main components

1. Passenger interface, which is integrated to the car operating panel. The passenger interface contains an alarm button, a microphone, a loudspeaker and two indicator lights. 2. GSM terminal, which is installed on top of the elevator car. * 3. A connection to PSTN line with a socket on the elevator shaft or in the machine room. * 4. Remote Interface (Phone) board, which is a printed circuit board installed inside the car top connection box. Phone takes care of remote alarms, controls the emergency telephone and handles the telephone line. All the phone numbers that the KRM Emergency Phone uses are stored in the Phone board. 5. Battery, which guarantees the operation of the system during a power failure. The battery is installed inside the car top connection box. * The telephone connection to the rescue service is made through the PSTN network or, if installed, it can be made through the GSM terminal.

OM-13.25.001


6

Owner’s Manual

5. USING THE KRM EMERGENCY PHONE Note! The KRM Emergency Phone must be kept in continuous operation to ensure that the elevator is safe for passengers and maintenance technicians. The elevator must be taken out of service when the KRM Emergency Phone is out of order.

5.1. Normal operation in a rescue situation -

In a rescue situation, the passenger pushes the alarm button on the car operating panel for at least three seconds. The alarm button is marked with a yellow bell symbol.

-

The passenger interface gives audible and visible signals to indicate that the KRM system has registered the alarm. The phone device starts dialling to the rescue service. The flashing yellow indicator light or “Alarm registered” sign in the car operating panel indicates that the dialling is in progress.

-

A green indicator light on the car operating panel indicates that the rescue service has received the alarm and that the voice link is open..

-

The person in the rescue service can now talk with the entrapped passengers and may confirm site details by pressing button '4' on the telephone keypad. The rescue service may terminate the telephone call & reset the alarm by pressing '3 # ' on the telephone keypad. (Note:- The Elevator will automatically make repeated Emergency Alarm Calls if the 3 # command is not detected).

-

After technician has released the passengers he creates a new alarm to inform the rescue service about the release

-

The rescue service resets the alarm by pressing ‘3#’ on the telephone keypad.

OM-13.25.001


7

Owner’s Manual

5.2. Changing parameter values (PSTN and GSM) When you do not have a KONE Service contract, the parameter values of the emergency phone can be changed via a normal telephone. The following procedure shows how you can change the parameter values.

1. Contact the KONE Customer Care Center: -

Ensure that the KONE Customer Care Center has enabled DTMF configuration. The “DTMF configuration enabling” parameter on the Phone board must be “enabled”.

-

Ask for the DTMF configuration password.

-

Ask for the phone ID. On the phone board there is a rotary switch. The phone ID refers to the rotary switch position (1...4). (Does not apply to GSM option.)

2. Call to elevator phone number and wait until you hear a beep tone. This may take a few seconds (with GSM there is no beep tone). 3. Submit the phone ID by pressing the correct button (1...4). After pressing elevator ID, there is a line training sequence up to 6 seconds time (2-6 sec.) and you may here strong noise. Wait that the noise stops, before giving your DTMF commands. (This does not apply for GSM). The selected phone is now waiting for your DTMF commands. You have approximately 1-minute time to press the first button in the DTMF command sequence. 4. If you want to ensure that you are calling to the right phone, press button 4. The system plays a recorded voice file for you. The file tells you the equipment ID. 5. Press #*# to enter the DTMF configuration mode system beeps once, and is ready for parameter changes. 6. Submit the phone DTMF configuration password and press “#”. Wait for one audible beep. Now you are in the DTMF configuration mode and can change the configurable parameter values. If you give wrong password, elevator terminates the call (hang up). You have approximately 1-minute time to press each button in the DTMF command sequence. 7. For each parameter, press # *# to change the parameter value. See the details in the table below. There is also an example on the next page. 8. Press *# or wait to exit from the configuration and hang up, press *# or wait 60 seconds for automatic hang up by phone. See more exemples in appendix. The following tables list all parameters and the command protocol to change the parameters.

OM-13.25.001


8

Owner’s Manual

Parameter name

No

Description

Primary alarm call phone number Secondary alarm call phone number Routine call number

1

3

The primary number to call alarm calls (*) The secondary number to call alarm calls (*) Phone number to call routine calls (**)

Battery failure call number Alarm button filter time

4

Phone number to call failure calls (**)

5

Routine call period

6

The time in seconds between pushing the alarm and the system registering the alarm Routine call period in days

Alarm button monitoring Password

7 8

Time Equipment ID

9 10

Not used Receiver type for primary alarm call phone number Receiver type for secondary alarm call phone number Receiver type for routine call phone number Receiver type for failure call phone number Country code

11 12

2

Parameter to set the alarm filtering on or off Password to enter DTMF configuration mode (****) Current time (not used) Elevator identification number

Possible values Default value 1-18 numbers, * Empty 1-18 numbers, * Empty 1-18 numbers, * Empty 1-18 numbers, * Empty 1-30 3 1-3 1 1=alarm filtering on 2= alarm filtering off Four numbers 1234 Empty 1-18 numbers (0…9) Empty

Defines the receiver type in rescue service for primary alarm call phone number Defines the receiver type in rescue service for secondary alarm call phone number Defines the receiver type in rescue service for routine call phone number

See below (***) 2

15

Defines the receiver type in rescue service for failure call phone number

See below (***) 2

16

Country code according to T.35 standard

199

13

14

See below (***) 2 See below (***) 2

* (star) equals 0,5-2 seconds delay in dialling. * can be used e.g. after first number, when KRM is installed under PBX. (*) KRM tries to call first 4 times to primary number then 4 times to secondary number. Then restart the sequence. (**) KRM tries to call 5 times. (***) Possible receiver types: • 2=normal phone with KONE equipment ID audio file (default) • 3=DTMF receiver • 4=normal phone with ELevLocation audio file and 10 sec answer time • 5=normal phone with ELevLocation audio file and 30 sec answer time (****) Password can be reset to factory settings as follows: • Switch off KRM • Set “phone ID switch” on RIF board to position 8 • Power on KRM • Wait 10 seconds • Switch off KRM • Set “phone ID switch” on RIF board back to original position • Power on KRM OM-13.25.001


9

Owner’s Manual

DTMF sequence #*#

*# #n*v#

#n*# #n*v*v#

Timeout

OM-13.25.001

Action

Audible signal

Note

Enter the DTMF configuration mode

1 beep = ok 2 beeps = error

You can enter the DTMF configuration mode only, when the DTMF configuration mode is enabled

1 beep = ok 2 beeps = error

Example: #12*3456# 12= command name 3456= parameter value Example: #12*# sets parameter 12 to default value Used when password is changed.

Exit DTMF configuration mode and hang up Set parameter n to value v

Setting the parameter n to a default value Give the parameter value twice if to verify the parameter setting Not allowed character on current string feed and acknowledged by user Timeout (60 sec.) for DTMF command in DTMF configuration mode

1 beep = ok 2 beeps = error 1 beep = ok 2 beeps = error 2 beeps

You are trying to give a non-acceptable parameter name or value

2 beeps

If you do not give new parameter in 60 seconds the system will hang up


10

Owner’s Manual

6. GLOSSARY Term

Definition

alarm button

button for activating the alarm bell Pushing the alarm button activates voice connection if remote monitoring is used.

car operating panel

user interface for passengers inside the elevator car A car operating panel includes car call buttons, alarm button, door open button and so on.

dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF)

signal that a telephone sends to the network

DTMF configuration mode

Operation mode of the phone board

When you press a button on your telephone, it generates a DTMF signal. Based on the signal the network can interpret which button you have pressed.

When the board is in this mode, the parameter values can be changed.

KONE Remote Monitoring (KRM)

Remote monitoring system provided by KONE

Phone board

Printed circuit board that takes care of the KRM functions

public switched telephone network (PSTN)

International telephone system based on copper wires carrying analog voice data

remote monitoring

System which is used to monitor the operation and event history of elevators and escalators

OM-13.25.001


11

Owner’s Manual

7. APPENDIX

Indicator lights on the passenger interface

Indicator

Name

1

Alarm registered

2

Voice contact

OM-13.25.001

Status ON OFF Blinking ON OFF

Indication Voice contact is ON or alarm active is active (accepted but not reset) No alarms. Alarm has been registered, but there is no voice contact yet. Voice contact is ON. Voice contact is OFF.


12

Owner’s Manual

Indicator lights on the phone board

Phone ID Switch

1027272.wmf

Indicator

Colour

Status ON (PSTN)

GSM FAIL / PSTN FAIL

Red

CALL

Yellow

ALARM

BATT

MAINS

OM-13.25.001

Yellow

Red

Green

ON (GSM) OFF (PSTN) OFF (GSM) Blinking (GSM) ON OFF 0.5 s ON, 0.5 s OFF ON 2 s ON, 1 s OFF 0.3 s ON, 0.3 s OFF, 0.3 s ON, 2 s OFF OFF ON OFF ON Blinking OFF

Indication The telephone line is missing, line voltage is less than 33 VDC or there is no dialing tone. No GSM connection The telephone line status is normal. The status is normal. GSM field strength weak Telephone call in progress. The alarm has been registered but not served. The alarm is active and served. Configuration download is ongoing. No configuration, wrong configuration. No alarms activated. Battery failure. The battery needs to be replaced The battery fuse has blown The battery is OK. Main power is on. Main power is not connected, the battery is used as the power supply. No power at the phone board. The system is not in use.


13

Owner’s Manual

Voice alarm call to normal phone This example shows a voice call from KRM Emergency phone to a normal phone used by a operator. Emergency phone Dial

Operator phone Answer

Detect answer and play Call reason-voice message Send beep to indicate that KRM is ready for voice Send speech time end warning

⎯ Voice message → ⎯ 500Hz 300 ms → Speech ⎯ 1200Hz 500 ms → ←5⎯ Speech ← 3# ⎯

Hang up

Extend voice call open time Reset alarm and hang up Hang up

Voice call to KRM Emergency phone (PSTN) Emergency phone Answer Send multidrop selection syncmark

Operator phone Dial to emergency phone ⎯ 1200Hz 600 ms → ← LID ⎯

Send test sound

Send speech time end warning

⎯ noise → ←5⎯ Speech ⎯ 1200Hz 500 ms → ←5⎯ Speech ← 3# ⎯

Hang up

Wait beep Select phone to be connected. 1-4 phones can share one telephone line. Wait silently until noise ends (2-6 seconds) Extend voice call open time

Extend voice call open time Reset alarm and hang up (This is needed although alarm is not active) Hang up

LID = Local ID; number 1…4; Value is the same as the rotary switch position on KRM board.

OM-13.25.001


14

Owner’s Manual

Voice call to KRM Emergency phone (GSM) Emergency phone

Operator phone Dial to emergency phone

Answer

Send speech time end warning

←5⎯ Speech ⎯ 1200Hz 500 ms → ←5⎯ Speech ← 3# ⎯

Hang up

Extend voice call open time

Extend voice call open time Reset alarm and hang up (This is needed although alarm is not active) Hang up

Configuration call to KRM Emergency phone (PSTN) Emergency phone Answer Send multidrop selection syncmark

Operator phone Dial to emergency phone ⎯ 1200Hz 600 ms → ← LID ⎯

Send test sound

Acknowledge Acknowledge Acknowledge

Acknowledge

Acknowledge

⎯ noise → ← #*# ⎯ ⎯ Beep → ← 1234# ⎯ ⎯ Beep → ← #10*123456# ⎯ ⎯ Beep → ← #16*61# ⎯ ⎯ Beep → ← #1*123456# ⎯ ⎯ Beep → ← *# ⎯

Hang up

Wait beep Select phone to be connected. 1-4 phones can share one telephone line. Wait silently until noise ends (2-6 seconds) Enter configuration mode Give password Program Equipment ID Program country code (France) Program primary alarm call number Exit configuration mode and hang up Hang up

xxx = do not care EqID = Equipment ID

LID = Local ID; number 1…4; Value is the same as the rotary switch position on KRM board.

OM-13.25.001


15

Owner’s Manual

OM-13.25.001


16

=

TM

KONE E-Link USER MANUAL, BASICS

5.1

Copyright © 2009 KONE Corporation All rights reserved under International Copyright Conventions. No part of the contents of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or translated into another language or format, in whole or part, without written consent of KONE Corporation.

KONE E-LinkTM 5.1 USER MANUAL, BASICS

0B1. Introduction ......................................................................................................5 5B1.1 Purpose of this document ............................................................................5 6B1.2 What is KONE E-Link™? .............................................................................6 7B1.3 System configuration....................................................................................7 8B1.4 KONE E-Link™ views ..................................................................................8 17BBuilding view ..................................................................................................9 18BSite view.......................................................................................................10 19BBuilding and Site icons.................................................................................11 20BTraffic view ...................................................................................................12 2. Functions for elevators .................................................................................19 9B2.1 Sending elevator calls ................................................................................19 21BCar call .........................................................................................................19 10B2.2 Changing elevator mode ............................................................................21 1B2.3 Setting elevator locks .................................................................................23 2BLocking.........................................................................................................23 342BUnlocking .....................................................................................................25 1B3. Additional tools ..............................................................................................27 3.1 Starting the additional tool applications......................................................28 3.2 Reporting tool.............................................................................................29 24BAvailable report types...................................................................................31 25BDefining report settings ................................................................................32 26BReport summary...........................................................................................33 27BPrinting the reports.......................................................................................34 28BExporting the reports....................................................................................34 13B3.3 Playback tool..............................................................................................35 29BCreating a new playback file ........................................................................36 30BOther Menu bar functionality of the Playback Tool ......................................37 14B3.4 KONE E-Link™ Scheduler Tool .................................................................38 32BScheduler Tool main window .......................................................................39 www.kone.com

3 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

40BWorking with schedules ...............................................................................40 3BOther Menu bar functionality of the Scheduler Tool .....................................40 2BAppendix 1..........................................................................................................42 15BElevator modes ................................................................................................42 3BAppendix 2..........................................................................................................45 16BEscalator and autowalk modes ........................................................................45 4BAPPROVALS.......................................................................................................48

www.kone.com

4 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

1. Introduction 0B

1.1 Purpose of this document 5B

This document gives the basic instructions of how to use KONE E-link™ 5.1. Target audiences and defined end users of this document are: 

Building managers



Receptionists



External customers.

This document does not provide information for installation nor configuration of KONE E-link™ 5.1. For start-up configuration and installation of KONE E-Link™ 5.1, see UM-13.20.005. Tip For in-depth and detailed user manual of KONE E-Link™ 5.1, see UM-13.20.004

www.kone.com

5 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

1.2 What is KONE E-Link™? 6B

KONE E-LinkTM is an application for monitoring and controlling elevators and escalators. With KONE E-LinkTM you can:        

Monitor device status on real-time Monitor alarm status Monitor network View reports Command elevators to provide special services Control access to and from certain floors View Traffic history playback Issue commands and change locks according to a schedule

KONE E-LinkTM operates closely with other KONE applications within your management system. The connections to other applications are depicted in Figure 1. X

Figure 1: Elevator and escalator management system.

www.kone.com

6 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

1.3 System configuration 7B

Workstation or the KONE Interface Controller (KIC) communicates with elevator and escalator controllers. All the KIC units and the workstation in the building or in the site area can be connected together via LAN network creating one elevator and escalator management system. There can be several KIC units and one workstation in one system. Workstation and KIC units are configured with KONE E-LinkTM Configuration Tool. With KONE E-LinkTM Status Web Pages KIC units can be monitored and updated over network. KONE E-LinkTM Traffic View connects closely with Configuration Tool application. Configuration Tool produces configuration files for KONE E-LinkTM.

www.kone.com

7 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

1.4 KONE E-Link™ views 8B

Monitor operations and the use of elevators and escalators You can monitor in real-time your elevator and escalator management system in a site, building, group and device level. With KONE E-LinkTM Traffic View you can also monitor the status of the device alarms. Additionally, you can monitor the network status of the management system. Command elevators to provide special services With KONE E-LinkTM Traffic View -application you can send calls to elevators. Additionally, you can change operating mode of elevators. Control access to and from certain floors KONE E-LinkTM Traffic View enables you to lock specific floors.

Figure 2: Site consists of one or more buildings. Buildings have device group that include one or more devices. Device can be an elevator, an escalator or an autowalk.

www.kone.com

8 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Building view 17B

Building view (Figure 3) displays one building where device groups and devices are located. Usually Building view background image is a building map. Additionally, Building views can include areas (Figure 4). These areas are shortcuts to other views. X

X

Figure 3: Building view. When the mouse pointer is on top of an icon, a tooltip opens.

www.kone.com

9 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Site view 18B

Site view is the root view of the configuration. When the user selects Home button, the user is directed to Site view.

Figure 4: Site view. Outlined areas in the pictures are called areas. When the mouse pointer is on top of an area, area is highlighted.

www.kone.com

10 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Building and Site icons 19B

Building and Site views include group icons, device icons and combined icons. Each group, device, and combined icon has a tooltip that opens when the mouse pointer is on top of the icon. Tooltip includes more information of the group and/or device. 

Device icons. Device icons show the status of the specific elevator, escalator or autowalk. Device icons are also shortcuts to traffic views. The four different statuses of the devices are Normal, Fail, No connection and Offline.

Normal. Device is in normal mode.

Fail. Device is in fail mode.

No connection. The connection to elevator, escalator or autowalk cannot be established. Offline. There is no connection to the E-Link™ workstation or to the KIC.



Group icons. Group icons show the status of the specific elevator, escalator or autowalk group. Group icons are also shortcuts to traffic views. The four different statuses of the groups are Normal, Fail, No connection and Offline.

Normal. All devices of the group are in normal mode. Fail. One or more devices of the group are in fail mode. No connection. The connection to elevator, escalator or autowalk cannot be established. Offline. There is no connection to the E-Link™ workstation or to the KIC.

www.kone.com

11 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27



Combined icons. Combined icons show the status of the specifically configured device group. Devices do not need to be same type or belong to the same group. Combined icons are also shortcuts to specifically configured views. The four different statuses of the combined icons are Normal, Fail, No connection and Offline.

Normal. All devices of the group are in normal mode.

Fail. One or more devices of the group are in fail mode.

No connection. Network connection to one or more devices of the group cannot be established.

Offline. There is no connection to the ELink workstation or to the KIC.

Traffic view 20B

Traffic view displays device traffic. Traffic view displays traffic of group that includes one or more devices. There are two types of traffic views: traffic views for elevators and traffic views for escalators and autowalks.

www.kone.com

12 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Elevator traffic view

Figure 5: Context menu in Elevator traffic view. Elevator traffic view (Figure 6) illustrates the elevators shafts. Elevator shafts may differ as different group models, such as Destination control system (DCS) and double decks, are displayed differently. With traffic view it can be easily monitored in which floor each elevator currently is. Additionally, you can monitor the status of call and elevator mode. Traffic view also shows the load percentage of the elevator car.

www.kone.com

13 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Figure 6: Traffic icons.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)

www.kone.com

Car call Normal landing call Multiple landing calls Floor Extension Top (Fet) landing call up Floor Extension Bottom (Feb) landing call down Parking landing call Car call lock Landing/Special call lock Emergency floor Fire doors Express zone Express zone compressed

14 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Elevator traffic view includes also a context menu. The context menu can be opened from the shaft, from the floor bar, or from sides bar. Context menu has items: 

Car call…



Priority call…



Destination call…



Lock, Unlock



Change Mode…



Lift parking



Floor height



Compression level

Note! Available options are based on the system configuration. Car call…, Priority call..., Destination call…, and Change Mode... menu items open dialogs where you can send calls and change elevator mode.

F

Figure 7: Priority landing calls.

www.kone.com

(6)

Priority landing call –high

(7)

Priority landing call –low

15 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Passenger view With passenger view you can monitor the status of individual passenger’s journey in the elevator. This feature is available only in elevators equipped with Destination Control System.

Figure 8: Passenger view window of the traffic tool.

Alarm view With alarm view you can monitor if some of the elevators is in fault mode. This fastens up fixing the problem and overall maintenance and supervision.

Figure 9: Alarm view window of the traffic tool.

www.kone.com

16 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Escalator and auto-walk traffic – view

Figure 10: Escalator traffic view. Escalator traffic view includes a context menu.

In Escalator and auto-walk traffic – view you can monitor in which direction each device is currently running. Additionally, you can monitor the status of escalator and auto-walk mode.

Escalator traffic view includes also context menu. Context menu can be opened on top of device group.

Context menu has items Change mode…, and Stop.

Note Changing mode or stopping device – function are not currently implemented.

www.kone.com

17 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Extended view Extended view collects all the wanted devices on the same page. Devices can be elevators, escalators or autowalks and the devices do not need to belong to same group. Extended view is used so that monitoring all devices at once would be possible. All devices can be located to the same view because only the modes of all items are shown. In other words, in case of an elevator, the elevator shaft is not shown on the display.

Figure 11: Extended view.

Manual The manual can be opened by choosing Help Contents… menu item under Help menu (see the Menu bar in Figure 11 above). To find a topic you would like to review, use Contents, Index, Bookmarks, and Search tabs.

www.kone.com

18 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

2. Functions for elevators

You can command elevators remotely by sending calls, changing elevator modes, and setting locks.

2.1 Sending elevator calls 9B

KONE E-LinkTM enables remote control of the elevators. Calls to elevators and elevator groups can be given on the Elevator traffic view.

Car call 21B

A car call is an elevator call that corresponds to passenger’s request made inside the elevator car. To send a car call using Elevator traffic view: 1. Select Car call... from the context menu (Figure 12), or double-click the elevator shaft view. X

Figure 12: Selecting Car call… from the context menu.

www.kone.com

19 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

2. Determine the correct floor and side to the call from the Car call dialog (Figure 13). X

Figure 13: Car call dialog.

3. Send the car call with Send and close the dialog with Close.

Tip Several Car call dialogs of different elevators can be open simultaneously.

www.kone.com

20 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

2.2 Changing elevator mode 10B

You can change elevator modes on Elevator traffic view. To change elevator mode, select Change mode... from the context menu (Figure 14), or double-click the mode icon. X

Note The mode change must be enabled in the elevator software.

Figure 14: Selecting Change mode… from the context menu in Elevator traffic view.

www.kone.com

21 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

You can either set or remove modes from Elevator mode dialog (Figure 15). Select the suitable mode alternative and change the mode with Send and close the dialog with Close. X

Note The modes must be included in the elevator software.

Figure 15: Elevator mode dialog.

Tip Several Elevator mode dialogs of different elevators may be open simultaneously.

www.kone.com

22 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

2.3 Setting elevator locks 1B

You can lock and unlock specified calls on the elevator traffic view. Locked calls cannot be sent.

Locking 2B

To lock calls 1. Select the floor or floors you want to affect. 2. Select Lock menu item from the context menu (Figure 16). X

Tip By selecting multiple floors, you can determine lock settings to all selected floors at once.

Figure 16: Selecting a locking alternative from the context menu.

www.kone.com

23 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

You can lock all calls, lock landing calls, or lock car calls. Additionally, you can select More… which opens a dialog where you can determine more specific lock combinations (Figure 17). X

Figure 17: Lock dialog.

Select the suitable lock alternatives and verify locks with OK or cancel locking with Cancel. Note Checking the Keep other locks box maintains also the previously set locks.

www.kone.com

24 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Unlocking 342B

To unlock calls: 1. Select the floor or floors you want to unlock. 2. Select Unlock menu item from the context menu (Figure 18). X

Tip By selecting multiple floors, you can remove lock settings from all selected floors at once.

Figure 18: Selecting an unlocking alternative from the context menu.

www.kone.com

25 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

You can unlock all calls, unlock landing calls, or unlock car calls. Additionally, you can select More… which opens a dialog where you can determine more specific unlocking combinations (Figure 19). X

Select the suitable unlocking alternatives and verify removed locks with OK or cancel unlocking with Cancel.

Figure 19: Unlock dialog.

www.kone.com

26 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

3. Additional tools 1B

There are three tools that fulfill the features KONE E-Link™. With these tools long term supervising is easier, and more accurate information about traffic flows can be measured. The tools are:

www.kone.com



Reporting tool



Playback tool



Scheduler tool

27 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

3.1 Starting the additional tool applications To access to additional tools, use your mouse for navigation in the following way:

1.

2.

Figure 20: Mouse navigation for accessing to additional tools The accessing is done in elevator (escalator) traffic view by clicking your right-hand button of your mouse. You can make the click in two different locations of the view: 1. In Group header of the view, which opens a simple submenu. You can select an overall report to Report Tool, or start the Playback Tool main view. Note Only one group at the time. 2. In Floor indicator area (floor 6 in the example), which opens a broader submenu selection. The selection includes accesses directly to more detailed views. The Scheduler Tool is activated from the View drop-down menu in the menu bar of KONE E-Link™. 12B

www.kone.com

28 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

3.2 Reporting tool With reporting tool you can create reports regarding the usage of your elevator and/or escalator equipment. These reports are useful when traffic flow improvements are planned. The reports can be: 

Viewed



Saved



Edited



Printed



Exported to .csv and .pdf formats

Figure 21: Reporting tool main window and its structure.

Note Reporting Tool has more limited character set than usual, and you will not be able to type all available characters. Therefore, pay attention to selected values to be typed, typing some values will not successful.

www.kone.com

29 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

To create a report, click Add report… button from the Navigation sidebar. This opens empty Edit Report –dialog.

1.

3.

2. Figure 22: Edit Report dialog.

The Edit Report –dialog has the following items, which can be used for customizing the generated reports: 1. General area is where you define a name for the report. The name must be always unique; otherwise the report will not be saved. In addition, you can write a description for each report. 2. Time frame area is where you define the start and end times for the information gathering. In Duration field you can define an overall definition for the period of time. In From and To fields you can define the time period to be more specific. 3. Reports area is where you can Add… different report types to be recorded, and Edit… them after addition, to define each reports parameters. The following main categories for different reports are available by default:

www.kone.com



Alarm reports



Elevator reports



Escalator reports



Destination control system reports



Non-KONE Elevator reports



Non-KONE Escalator reports

30 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Available report types 24B

The available report types are in detail: 1. Alarm reports 

Number of Alarms per Time Unit



Alarm Log

2. Elevator reports 

Number of Landing Calls per Time Unit



Number of Landing Calls per Floor



Landing Call Time Distribution per Time Unit



Landing Call Time Distribution per Floor



Elevator Availability Summary



Elevator Operation Summary

3. Escalator reports 

Escalator Summary

4. Destination control system reports 

DCS Passengers per Time Unit



DCS Passengers per Floor



DCS Time to Destination per Time Unit



DCS Time to Destination per Floor



DCS Call Time Distribution

5. Non-KONE Elevator reports 

Non-KONE Elevator Availability Summary

6. Non-KONE Escalator reports 

www.kone.com

Non-KONE Escalator Summary

31 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Defining report settings 25B

When you have added the desired report alternatives, you can define the settings for each report. When you click Edit… in Edit Report –dialog (Figure 22), the Edit Report Sheet –dialog opens. X

1.

2.

3.

Figure 23: Edit Report Sheet –dialog (one example). The Edit Report Sheet –dialog has three main areas: 1. The General area, which indicates what report type is in question, along with description. 2. Devices area, which indicates what devices are selected for the reports. If no devices are available, click Select… to add devices (single elevators, elevator groups, escalators…). 3. Parameters area, which is used to set the desired parameters for the report, such as Time unit intervals, Priorities Included etc. Note The contents of the Parameter area varies between different report types selected. Therefore, for some report types, more or/and different parameters are available and different kind of configuring can be done.

www.kone.com

32 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Report summary 26B

After selecting report sheet parameters in Edit Report Sheet –dialog (Figure 23) you can view the summary of selected parameters in Edit Report –dialog (Figure 24).

1. Figure 24: Edit report -dialog when report parameters have been selected.

The sheet parameters are visible in Reports area of the dialogue. You can save the report or view one or more of the reports if one created earlier (1). Note To view the report with KONE E-Link™ Reporting Tool, both Time frame and Reports needs to be selected after clicking the Save… button. Report can also be viewed although the report is not saved. In this case the report is not saved, and therefore you cannot view nor edit the report when you try to access it again. In Windows, by default, the report is saved to the program folder where the KONE E-Link™ is installed (C:\Program Files\KONE\KONE E-Link Reporting Tool).

www.kone.com

33 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Printing the reports 27B

The reports can be printed only in viewing mode. You can access to a specific report from Report Tool main window or from Edit Report –dialogue. The chosen report opens to main window of the Report Tool. To print the opened report, use menu path File – Print. Choose the appropriate printing options and click Print. Exporting the reports 28B

The reports can be exported only in viewing mode. You can access to a specific report from Report Tool main window or from Edit Report –dialogue. The chosen report opens to main window of the Report Tool. To export the opened report use menu path File – Export as PDF or File – Export as CSV. Choose the alternative which is most suitable, by default exported reports are saved to the Desktop, and the report name is used as file name.

www.kone.com

34 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

3.3 Playback tool 13B

KONE E-Link™ Playback Tool is a multi-platform application for playing stored monitoring information gathered from a network of transportation devices such as elevator, escalators and autowalks. With KONE E-Link™ Playback Tool you can:  

Replay specific recording files Connect to a playback server and generate new recording file

Figure 25: Playback Tool main window.

KONE E-Link™ Playback Tool has a menu bar for basic operations. The Playback Tool menu bar has five drop-down menus: File, View, Controls, Tools, and Help.

www.kone.com

35 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Creating a new playback file 29B

Menu item File – New Playback… opens Create New Playback File –dialog (Figure 26). You can use this function for creating playback file from data stored to database. X

1.

2.

3.

Figure 26: Create New Playback File dialog. 1. Select Database area, where you can Connect/Disconnect to the selected database server (from the drop-down menu). You can also Edit… the database properties (Add/Remove database information). 2. Select Device Group area, where you can select the device group for the file. Only one group can be selected. 3. Time Frame area, where you can define the start and end time for the file, as well as duration. You can also define the destination folder where the playback file will be created. After all of the settings are defined, click Create.

www.kone.com

36 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

When there is a playback file already available, you can open it for viewing by using menu path File – Open. The format of the playback file is .kep Furthermore, you can save a copy of the playback file by using menu path File – Save Copy As… which opens a Save File –dialog.

Other Menu bar functionality of the Playback Tool 30B

The other drop-down menus in Menu bar of the Playback Tool (Figure 25) contain alternatives for different purposes. X

In View –menu, you can define the information contents to be shown in Playback Tool main window. These content options are: 

Alarm List for alarms



Event List regarding general traffic flows



DCS Passenger List regarding, for example ordered landing calls.

In Controls –menu you can operate the playback file, either play the file or skip to the next event defined by time interval, for example. In Tools –menu you can Reset the settings, choose appropriate language and choose a locale version of the language. In Help menu, you can search tips and guidance for the use of KONE ELink™ Playback Tool application. From the help menu you also find the version number of the tool.

www.kone.com

37 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

3.4 KONE E-Link™ Scheduler Tool 14B

KONE E-Link™ Scheduler Tool is a multi-platform application for issuing calls or locking or mode changes to elevators according to pre-defined schedule. With Scheduler Tool you can: 

Define schedule for calls



Define schedule for elevator locking



Define schedule for elevator mode changes

A Schedule is created for one elevator group. You can edit one group’s Schedule at a time. If there are many elevator groups in the building, you need to create or edit each groups schedule individually. The schedule is based on repeating weekly schedule and exceptions which are called special days. User creates the weekly schedule which is repeated every week (by default, forever). Then, user can create exceptions to that weekly schedule, which are called the special days. If a command or locking is required for one particular day only, it is called also a special day event.

www.kone.com

38 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Scheduler Tool main window 32B

1. 2.

4.

3.

Figure 27: Scheduler Tool main window and its structure. 1. Menu bar area includes the most common drop-down menus for operating the Schedule Tool. 2. Toolbar area includes the shortcut commands for some of the Scheduler Tool features. 3. Monthly calendar area shows the date on monthly basis. 4. Weekly calendar area shows the time range in more detail as weekly basis. KONE E-Link™ Scheduler Tool has a menu bar for basic operations. KONE E-Link™ Scheduler Tool menu bar has five drop-down menus: File, View, Controls, Tools, and Help.

www.kone.com

39 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

From the File –menu you can: 

Switch user



Open and Save files



Import, Install and Enable schedules



Exit the tool

Working with schedules 40B

To select a predefined schedule for elevator group(s), choose File – Import Group Schedule. To open a predefined schedule for editing, choose File – Open. To save the scheduler file, choose File – Save (As…). The file format is .sch. To install the existing or edited schedule to the KIC or Workstation, choose File – Install Schedule. To activate the previously installed schedule in the KIC or Workstation, choose File – Enable Schedule. The Workstation or KIC send commands to the elevator controller according to the schedule after this. Other Menu bar functionality of the Scheduler Tool 3B

The other drop-down menus in Menu bar of the Scheduler Tool (Figure 27) contains alternatives for different purposes. X

In View –menu, you can define the information contents to be shown in Scheduler Tool main window. These content options are: 

Calendar, which shows months and the selected week.



Week, which shows selected week and the available operations.



Special days, which shows the selected day only with the month related to that day. With menu item Edit – Add, you can add an event to that particular day.



Scheme edit, which shows the locking scheme editor. In this view you can define different elevator locking.



Event list, which shows the list of operations for the elevator group.



Table, which shows a weekly calendar view of operations for the elevator group.

Edit –menu enables you to Add, Edit, Delete, Select all, Invert selection, Undo and Redo. The Edit drop-down menu is active only when editing the locking schedule or when editing the special day event.

www.kone.com

40 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Tools –menu enables you to reset the settings, choose appropriate language and choose a locale version of the language. In Help menu, you can search tips and guidance for the use of KONE ELink™ Playback Tool application. From the help menu you also find the version number of the tool.

www.kone.com

41 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Appendix 1 2B

Elevator modes 15B

Note! The features available in your elevator software can be activated / deactivated with KONE E-LinkTM.

Icon

www.kone.com

Mode Explanation abbreviation NOR

Normal. Elevator is in normal mode.

NOC

No connection. The monitoring system has no connection to the elevator. The elevator may be switched off, the elevator group may be switched off, or the communication is broken between the monitoring system and the group, or between the group and the elevator.

PAD

Special parking at predefined floor. The elevator has been switched to special parking mode. It drives normally, except that it is always parked at a special floor when it becomes free. It is disconnected from normal parking operations.

OSS

Elevator out of service. The elevator is out of service and does not operate.

SIM

Simplex service. This option is designed to allow one specified elevator to be removed from normal group service to answer a separate set of landing call buttons in full collective mode.

ATS

Attendant service. The elevator is controlled manually by an attendant in the car. It is normally available to the passengers.

PRC

Independent service. The elevator is switched to independent service, and it is controlled only with car call buttons. It does not respond to any landing calls.

STP

Emergency stop. The elevator has stopped due to a break in the safety chain; either from the stop button in the car or one of the safety switches.

SRV/INS

Inspection drive. The elevator has been switched to inspection drive by maintenance personnel. It can only drive manually with separate drive buttons.

EPD

Emergency power drive. There is a break in the normal power supply and the elevator is running under emergency power supply. Normally the elevators give limited service, such as one or two elevators running while the other elevators are out of service.

42 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

www.kone.com

EFA

Elevator in fail. Elevator has failed and is unable to drive. More information of the reason can be found in the operational events history.

FRD

Fireman’s drive. The elevator has been switched to fireman's service. It is either making an emergency return, or it is operated from inside the car by a fireman.

DIS

Disconnected. The elevator has been disconnected from landing calls with a switch in the elevator control panel.

EAQ

Earthquake. Upon operation of a seismic detector, elevators stop immediately, drive slowly to the next floor and stay there with the doors open.

PRH

Priority call at landing –high. The elevator is serving a high priority landing call and does not accept any other hall calls before the priority call has been served. The mode is immediately entered when a priority call needs service. The elevator automatically returns to normal service when it has completed a trip after serving the priority call.

PRL

Priority call at landing –low. As PRH, except that each priority calls is assigned to an empty car.

VIP

VIP service. The elevator is reserved for special VIP service, and it is not available for normal passengers.

BED

Hospital bed service. The elevator is in time queue service and serves only one landing call at a time. Each landing call gets an empty car.

HEC

In-car hospital service. The elevator operates in priority drive from the car. Drives only from the car calls.

HES

Hospital emergency service. The elevator has received an emergency hall call and will only serve that call. No other passenger requests are accepted.

COR

Correction drive. After stopping between floor levels, the elevator is run at slow speed to the nearest floor.

FRE

Fast recall. The elevator drives directly to the specified floor and stays there with the doors closed.

FSC

Freight service in car. The elevator is used for freight service, and it is not available for normal passengers.

RED

Rescue drive. A procedure to dispatch elevators in abnormal situations. The elevator is controlled manually from inside the elevator car. It is not serving normal passengers.

43 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

www.kone.com

RDS

Reserve dispatch. A procedure to dispatch elevators when car call buttons or landing call buttons are broken. Elevators stops on every floor and opens doors.

SYN

Lift position synchronizing. If the elevator loses its position, it is synchronized automatically by driving it to synchronizing floors.

CPS

Concentrated passenger service. Option to maximize handling capacity during heavy incoming traffic. The group is divided into several subgroups, which each serve entrance floors and dedicated zones in the upper part of the building.

DN peak

Down peak. Heavy outgoing traffic. Down calls get service priority over up calls. Vacant elevators are sent to the upper parts of the building.

Two way

Heavy two way traffic. Both heavy incoming and outgoing traffic. Vacant elevators are evenly distributed in the building.

Next up

Next up service. Special service to guarantee best possible service for incoming traffic by filling elevators optimally at the lobby floor(s), thus making the elevators leave the lobby at as even intervals as possible.

Split up

Split up group. The group is switched to two subgroups, each of which has its own landing call buttons.

Up peak

Up peak. Heavy incoming traffic. The entrance floor(s) get(s) service priority over down calls. All empty cars are immediately returned to entrance floors.

HWO

High wind operation. For safety reasons, the elevator reduces speed when strong winds are detected.

SWL

Storm operation. For safety reasons, the elevator stops running when storm winds are detected.

44 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

Appendix 2 3B

Escalator and autowalk modes 16B

Icon

Abbreviation

Additional

Explanation

abbreviation IdA

PWR

IdNdA

NOR

Sd

FLT

IdNdA

Disturbance. The disturbance input of the escalator interface is activated.

NOC

IdNd

No connection. The monitoring system has no connection to the escalator interface unit. It may be switched off or the communication is broken between workstation and the escalator interface unit.

NOR

BwC, BwE

Backwards Continuous / Energy. The autowalk is running backwards in Continuous / Energy mode.

NOR

FwC,

Forwards Continuous / Energy. The autowalk is running forwards in Continuous / Energy mode.

FwE NOR

BwA, BwU

NOR

FwU FwA

www.kone.com

Emergency stop. The escalator or autowalk has been stopped using an emergency stop button. The same indication may appear if the safety chain is broken.

EMG

45 (49)

Power off. The escalator power is switched off. Service drive. The device has been switched to service drive by maintenance personnel.

Backwards Automatic / User. The autowalk is in automatic operation (starts automatically when someone cuts the light beam). The autowalk is running backwards. Forwards Automatic / User. The autowalk is in automatic operation (starts automatically when someone cuts the light beam). The autowalk is running forwards.

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

NOR

IdNdA, IdNdU

NOR

Nd

No direction. The autowalk has no direction.

NOR

Bw

Backwards. The autowalk is moving backwards.

NOR

Fw

Forwards. The autowalk is moving downwards.

NOR

IdBwA, IdBwU

NOR

IdFwA, IdFwU

www.kone.com

Idle No direction Automatic / User. The escalator is standing in an idle state.

Idle Backward Automatic / User. The autowalk is running backwards in Automatic / User mode. The escalator is in idle state. Idle Forward Automatic, Idle Forward User. The autowalk is running forwards in Automatic / User mode. The escalator is in idle state.

NOR

DnC, DnE

Down Continuous / Energy. The escalator is moving downwards in Continuous / Energy mode.

NOR

UpC, UpE

Up Continuous / Energy. The escalator is moving Upwards in Continuous / Energy mode.

NOR

DnA, DnU

Down Automatic / User. The escalator is moving downwards in Automatic / User mode.

NOR

UpA, UpU

Up Automatic / User. The escalator is moving Upwards in Automatic / User mode.

NOR

IdNdU

Idle No direction User. The escalator is in idle state in user mode.

NOR

Nd

No direction. The escalator has no direction.

NOR

Dn

Down. The escalator is moving downwards.

46 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

www.kone.com

NOR

Up

Up. The escalator is moving upwards.

NOR

IdDnA, IdDnU

Idle Down Automatic / User. The escalator is moving downwards in Automatic / User mode. The escalator is in idle state.

NOR

IdUpA, IdUpU

Idle Up Automatic / User. The escalator is moving Upwards in Automatic / User mode. The escalator is in idle state.

47 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

APPROVALS 4B

Compiled by:

R&D project manager

Pasi Raitola

Information Product Author

Petri Ahola

Checked by:

KTO Component Manager

Fernando Garza

Approved by:

KTO Category Manager

Jari Helvilä

Translation approved by:

VERSION HISTORY Version

Date

Description of change

Approved by

-

2010-08-26

First issue

Jari Helvilä

A

2012-03-27

Minor changes to elevator traffic view context menu item list.

Jari Helvilä

www.kone.com

48 (49)

UM-13.20.006 (A) 2012-03-27

KONE Corporation www.kone.com This publication is for general informational purposes only and we reserve the right at any time to alter the product design and specifications. No statement this publication contains shall be construed as a warranty or condition, express or implied, as to any product, its fitness for any particular purpose, merchantability, quality or representation of the terms of any purchase agreement. Minor differences between printed and actual colors may exist. KONE, KONE Care™, KONE Customer Care Center™, KONE Remote Monitoring Services™, KONE Modular Based Maintenance™, KONE eOptimum™, KONE Care for Life™, KONE Voice Link™, KONE Data Link™ are registered trademarks of KONE Corporation. Copyright © 2007 KONE Corporation.

Owner Manual Kone

Recommend Documents